Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (187 trang)

GIAO AN AV7 BON COT

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (760.53 KB, 187 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>


<b>TEST</b>


<b>Period </b> <b>:1</b>


<b>Date Of Preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date Of Teaching</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes</b> <b>: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES :</b>


<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review knowledge they learnt in garde 6.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+To enable the students to use previous knowledge to do the next test and through the test
the teacher can know the students’ knowledge.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To educate the students aware the importance of learning English and use it in
communication.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision



<b>2. Skills :</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


+Paying attention to learning English.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Multiple choice,Gap-Fill,True-False,Rearrangement,Correction.


<b>3. Teaching aids :</b> Papers


<b>4. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson “Test”


<b>5. Previous exercises : </b>Knowledge in grade 6


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization:</b>


<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge :</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

Name :--- Date: ----


Class : 7A <b>TEST</b>



<b>SUBJECT : ENGLISH 7</b>
<i>Time</i> : <i>45’</i>


<b>MARKS</b> <b>REMARKS</b>


<b>I. Multiple Choice: (3ms) (Chọn đáp án đúng,sau đó khoanh trịn đáp án em chọn</b>


<i><b>Example (ví dụ) :</b></i> <i>I…….a teacher</i>. : . am b.are c.is
1.She is going---with her uncle. a.stay b.to stay c.staying


2.SaiGon is---than Cat Thanh. a.bigger b.biggest c.the biggest
3.What about---football this afternoon? a.play b.to play c.playing
4.Nu is----girl in my class. a.the tallest b.the taller c.tallest
5.What’s his----season?_Spring. a.favourite b.the c.liked
6.---does Hoa skip?_four times a week. a.How often b.When c.How
7.Mai is----aerobics now. a.doing b.do c.does
8.What does he do ---his free time? a.at b.in c.on
9.Peter is from England.He’s---- a.English b.Englishes c.England
10.How---rice does Mr.Hai produce? a.many b.much c.lot
11.Are there any---in the bridge? a.meat b.apple juice c.eggs


12.He has----oval face.. a.an b.a c.the


<b>II. Reading: A.Choose the words in the box and fill in the blanks : (2ms)</b>
<b>(Chọn đáp án đúng điền vào đoạn văn sau,khoan tròn đáp án em chọn)</b>


Nam likes--(13)--.He plays soccer on weekends.Lan,Nam’s sister,often goes--(14)--.Nam often plays sports in
the summer.He sometimes--(15)--his bike around the city.He never goes swimming in the winter;the water is
too cold then.---(16)—does your brother often do in the summer?



13. a) swim b) jog c) sports 14. a) badminton b) dance c) jogging
15. a) rides b) sails c) goes 16. a) How b) When c) What


<b>B.Read the text and then check True or False:(Đọc đoạn văn trên sau đó đọc các câu dưới.Nếu câu nào đúng so </b>
<b>với đoạn văn thì ghi(T),câu nào sai thì ghi (F) vào phần bên cạnh)(2ms)</b>


<b>Statements:</b>


<i><b>Example(ví dụ): </b></i> <i>Lan is Nam’s sister.</i> <b>T</b>


17.Nam doesn’t like sports. 17---


18.His sister often goes jogging.


18---19.He sometimes rides his bike around the city. 19---


20.The water isn’t cold in the winter. 20---


<b>III.Writing:A.Rearrange these words in the corrrect order:(sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu có nghĩa)(2ms) </b>


<i><b>Example(ví duï):</b></i> <i>are/you how/?</i>  How are you?


21.Mai/goes/sometimes/the/to/movies. 21.---
22.what / you /do/do /often?


22.---23.doing/what/are/you/now?
23.---24.your/what/is/nationality?.


<b>24.---B.Make questions for the following answers: (Đặt câu hỏi cho các từ gạch dưới) (1ms)</b>



<i><b>Example(ví dụ):</b></i> I want to go camping. <i>What do you want to do?</i>


25.They want to travel by train.
25.---26.He is vietnamese.


<i>26.---The </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>ANSWERS </b>



<b>QUESTIONS</b> <b> ANSWERS</b> <b>MARKS</b>


<b>1</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>2</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>3</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>4</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>5</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>6</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>7</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>8</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>9.</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>



<b>10.</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>11.</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>12.</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25 </b>


<b>13.</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>14.</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>15.</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>16.</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>17.</b> <b>F</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>18.</b> <b>T</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>19.</b> <b>T</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>20.</b> <b>F</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>21.</b> <b>Mai sometimes goes to the movies.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>22.</b> <b>What do you often do?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>23.</b> <b>What are you doing now?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>24.</b> <b>What is your nationality?</b> <b>0,5 </b>



<b>25.</b> <b>How do they want to travel?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>26.</b> <b>What is his nationality?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>TOTAL</b> <b>10 ms</b>


<b> THE QUALIFICATION TABLE</b>


<b> Classes</b> <b> Good</b> <b> Fair</b> <b> Average</b> <b> Weak</b> <b> Bad</b>
<b> 7A</b>


<b> 7A</b>
<b> 7A</b>
<b> 7A</b>
<b> 7A</b>
<b> 7A</b>









---<b></b>


-
-
---











---
-





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b>---* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>










</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>UNIT 1</b> <b>:</b> <b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 1</b> <b>: </b> <b>A_FRIENDS (A1,2)</b>


<b>Period </b> <b>: 2</b>


<b>Date of preparation :</b>


<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>To review and broarden the way of greeting and self-introducing.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to greet and self-introduce.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students have good greetings with their friends.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary :</b> Nice to meet you,Different,Unhappy,A lot of, Miss
<b>b. Structures :</b>



+ The simple present tense
+ Comparative


+ So + auxiliary verb + S.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to greet and self-introduce to their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method :</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques :</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Slap the Board,Translation .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 1 –A1,2


<b>4. Matearials needed :</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise :</b>
<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?



<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>
<b>A : FRIENDS </b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>



_Asks the students some questions:


+What do you do during your summer vacation?


+What do you say to your friends when you first meet
after the summer holiday?


+Are you happy to be back again?


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions


<b>UNIT1 :</b>


<b>BACK TO</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 1: A1,2</b>
<b>Period 2 :</b>


I.New words:
+Nice to meet you
+Different(a)
+Unhappy(a)#
happy



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


_Shows the pictures on page 10 and asks the students
to guess the content of the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Nice to meet you: [Translation]
+Different(a) [Translation]
+Unhappy(a)# happy
+A lot of (a) =Much
+Miss(v) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Slap The Board”


_Introduces the students the way of expressing
agreement.


+ <b>So + auxilary verb + S.</b>


Ex: I am a student.
So am I.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1</b>



_Has the students read through the dialogue.


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue without
looking their books.(Focus on their pronunciation and
stress)


_Lets the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to read the dialogue again and
answer the questions in their books.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


a)Her name is Hoa.
b)She is in class 7A.
c)Nam is also in class 7A.

<b>A2.</b>



_Shows the picture in the book and asks the students:
+How many school are there in the picture?


+Which school is bigger?



_Sets the situation and asks the students to read the
passage.


_Has the students work in groups of 8 and answer the


_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy


_Read the
dialogue
_Listen
and focus
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Read
and
answer


_Read
their
answers
_Listen
and
correct


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions
_Read the
text
_Work in


II.Answers:
A1:


a)Her name is Hoa.
b)She is in class 7A.
c)Nam is also in
class 7A.


A2:


a) She is from Hue.
b)She is staying with
her uncle and aunt.
c)No,she doesn’t


have any friends in
Ha Noi.


d)Her new school is
bigger than her old
school?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback
*Answers:


a) She is from Hue.


b)She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c)No,she doesn’t have any friends in Ha Noi.


d)Her new school is bigger than her old school?
e)She is unhappy.


_Asks one student to read the text again before the
class.


_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students work in groups of 8 and practise
speaking about their old school and new school,using
the structures:


+It has……..


+It is bigger/smaller……


_Calls some students to read their ideas before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes


_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson.
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise A1,2


+Learn by heart the new words.



+Prepare the new lesson Unit 1 A 3,4,5.
_Remarks the students’study.


groups
_Read
their
answers
_Listen


_Read the
text
_Correct
_Work in
groups


_Read
their
ideas
_Listen
and
correct
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b>1.Good points :</b>







<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 3</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>


<b>+</b>To review the way of greeting and use some pattern sentences in conversation .


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>



+By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to greet and say naturally in conversation
by using the pattern sentences.Moreover, they will be able to listen comprehension about one
conversation and rearrange it in the correct order.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+To make the students have good greetings with their friends.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Pretty good ; Not bad; Me, too..


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+ How is everything?
+ How about you?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to greet and say naturally with their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 1 : A3,4,5



<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>unit 1: A1,2


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>
<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>


<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 1:BACK TO SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 2 : A_ FRIENDS(A3,4,5) </b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Using pictures:</b>


_Asks the students some questions: _Listen


<b>UNIT1: BACK TO</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 2:</b>
<b>A_FRIENDS</b>
<b>(A3,4,5)</b>
<b>Period 3:</b>


I.New words:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(15ms)</b>


+What are they doing?



<b>_</b>Introduces the two people in the picture and say the
content of the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ Pretty good [Translation]
+ Not bad [Translation]


+ Me,too [Translaion/Example]
+How is everything?


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Slap The Board”


_Introduces the students the way of using some
greeting words:


+ Good morning
+ Good afternoon
+ Good evening
+ Hello/Hi


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A3.</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue(3 on page
12) without looking their books.(Focus on their
pronunciation and stress)



_Has the students read the dialogue.


_Lets the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


<b>A4.</b>


_Asks the students to guess the answers in the blanks in
dialogue a) and b) in A4.


_Calls some students to read their guessing .


_Plays the tape and asks the students to complete the
dialogue a) and b).


_Plays another time and asks the students to fill the
blanks they can’t do before.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.
_Gives feedback.
and
answer
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and


repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy
_Read the
dialogue
_Listen
and focus
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Guess
the
answers
_Read
their
guessing
_Listen
and
complete
the
dialogue
_Do as
directed
_Read

their
answers
_Listen
tốt(Khỏe)


+Not bad :Không tệ
+Me,too :Tôi cũng
vậy


+How is everything?
Mọi thứ như thế nào
rồi?=How are you ?
Bạn có khỏe khơng?
+ Good morning
+ Good afternoon
+ Good evening
+ Hello/Hi
II.Answers:
A4:


<b>a)</b>


1) How are you?
2) Pretty good
3) How about you?
4) Not bad


5)Me,too


<b>b)</b>



1)How is


everything?
2) O.K


3)How are you
today?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(3ms)</b>


*Answers:


<b>a)</b>


1) How are you? 2) Pretty good
3) How about you? 4) Not bad
5)Me,too


<b>b)</b>



1) How is everything? 2) O.K
3) How are you today? 4) Just fine
5) So am I


_Calls some pairs to roleplay the dialogues.

<b>A5.</b>



_Shows the pictures in the book and asks the students:
+Who are they in the picture?


+What are they doing?


_Says:”You will hear 4 conversations describing the
pictures but they are not in order.You listen and mark
the number in good order as conversation in the tape.)


_Plays the tape and asks the students to do as directed.
_Calls some students to read their answers.


_Gives feedback
* Answers:
c) b) d) a)


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogues.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes



_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson.
_Asks the students to:


+Repractice the dialogues.
+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit1 B1,2.
_Remarks the students’study.


and
correct


_Roleplay
_Listen
and
answer
the
questions
_Listen
_Read
their
answers
_Listen
_Read
their
answers
_Copy


_Work in
pairs


_Roleplay
_Listen
and
correct
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>





<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 4</b>



<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>


+ To introduce the students the way of ansking and answering about personal information
such as name,age,address.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about personal
information such as name,age,address and complete the dialogue.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students care arounding people.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Family name,middle name,talk


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+ How old are you?


+ What is your family name?
+ What is your middle name?
+ Where do you live?



<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_ Knowing how to care their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 1 –B1,2


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit1 A3,4,5


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>


<b>B_NAMES AND ADDRESSES (B1,2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>UNIT1: BACK TO</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>



<b>LESSON 3:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>* Using pictures:</b>


_Gives the situations and asks the students some
questions:


+Who are they in the picture?
+Where are they?


+What are they doing?
+What is the teacher doing?
+What are the students doing?
+What are they talking about?


<b>_</b>Introduces the the content of the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Family name(n) [Example]
+Middle name(n) [Example]
+To talk(v) [Translation]


Ex: Pham Thi Hoa



<b>Family name Middle name First name</b>


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Slap The Board”


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering personal information :


+ How old are you?
+•I am + numbers.
Ex: I am ten.


+ What is your family name?
•My family name is ……


Ex: My family name is Nguyen.
+ What is your middle name?
•My middle name is……..
Ex: My middle name is Thi.
+ Where do you live?
• live at……….


Ex: I live at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue(1 on page
15) without looking their books.(Focus on their
pronunciation and stress)



_Has the students read the dialogue.


_Lets the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to work in groups and answer the
questions.


_Calls some students to give their answers.


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen


and copy
_Listen
and focus
_Read the
dialogue
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Work in
groups
_Give
I.New words:


+Family name(n)
+Middle name(n)
+To talk(v)
II.Structures:


1.Cấu Trúc hỏi tuổi:
+ How old are you?
•+ I am + numbers.
Ex: I am ten.
2.Cấu Trúc hỏi hoï:
+ What is your
family name?


•+ My family name
is ……



Ex:


My family name is
Nguyen.


3.Cấu trúc hỏi tên
đệm:


+ What is your
middle name?


•+ My middle name
is……..


Ex:


My middle name is
Thi.


3.Cấu Trúc hỏi nơi
sinh sống:


+ Where do you
live?


+• live at……….


Ex: I live at 12 Tran
Hung Dao street.
III.Answers:


B1:


a) She is talking to
Miss Lien.


b) Her family name
is Pham.


c) Her middle name
is Thi.


d) She lives at 12
Tran Hung Dao.
B2:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


a) She is talking to Miss Lien.


b) Her family name is Pham.
c) Her middle name is Thi.


d) She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao.


<b>B2.</b>


<b>_</b>Reviews the students Wh-words.


<b>_</b>Sets the situation:”This is a dialogue between Lan
and Nga about Hoa’s information”


_Asks the students to work in groups and fill the blanks
with approriate wh- words in dialogue on page 16.
_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


1)Who 2) Who 3) What
4) Where 5) Where 6) How
_Calls some pairs to roleplay the dialogues.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering some personal questions .


+What your name?



+What is your family name?
+What is your middle name?
+Where do your live?


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes


_Asks one student to tell way of asking personal
information.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractice the dialogues.
+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit1 B4,5.
_Remarks the students’study.


their
answers
_Listen
and
correct


_Listen
and
answer
_Listen
_Work in
groups
_Read


_Listen
and
correct
_Roleplay
_Work in
pairs


_Roleplay
_Listen
_Answer
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


5) Where
6) How


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>





<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>










<b>UNIT 1</b> <b>: BACK TO SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 5</b>


<b>Date of preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>


+ To introduce the students the way of asking and answering about the distance of two places and
review them the way of asking and answering how people go to somewhere.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the distance of two
places and review them the way of asking and answering how people go to somewhere.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students care arounding people.


<b>1.Language : </b>



<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> How Far,Market,Movie theater,Post Office,Bus Stop


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+ How far is it from…….to…….? _About…….meters/kilometers
+ How do/does S+ V..?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Groupwork .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 1 –B4,5


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit1 B1,2


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings



<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.Presenta</b>
<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL</b>


<b>B_NAMES AND ADDRESSES (B4,5)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>



<b>* Using pictures:</b>


_Gives the situations and asks the students some
questions:


_Listen
and


<b>UNIT1: BACK TO</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 4:</b>


<b>B_NAMES AND</b>
<b>ADDRESSES</b>
<b>(B4,5)</b>


<b>Period 5:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


+How many people are there in the picture?
+Where are they?


+What are they?


<b>_</b>Introduces the the content of the lesson.



<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ Far (a) [Translation]
+Market (n) [Picture]
+Movie theater [Picture]
+Post Office (n) [Picture]
+Bus Stop (n) [Picture]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Slap The Board”


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering about the distance of two places and how
people go to somewhere.


+<b>How far is it from…….to…?</b>
_ <b>About…….meters/kilometers</b>.
Ex:


• How far is it from your house to school?
•About one kilometer.


+ <b>How do/does S+ V..?</b>


_ <b>S +V ….by + (means of transport)</b>


Ex:



• How do you go to school?
• I go to school by bike.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B4</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue(1 on page
15) without looking their books.(Focus on their
pronunciation and stress)


_Has the students read the dialogue.


_Lets the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


<b>B5.</b>


<b>_</b>Shows the pictures on page 17 and asks the students:
+ What are they?


<b>_</b>Makes a model with a good student.
T: How far is it from your house to school?
St: It’s about one kilometer.


_Asks the students to work in pairs to ask and answer
about the distance of the places.



_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.


answer
the
questions
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen
and focus
_Read the
dialogue
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Listen
and
answer
_Listen
_Work in


pairs
_Roleplay


+ Far (a)
+Market (n)


+Movie theater (n)
+Post Office (n)
+Bus Stop (n)
II.Structures:


+<b>How far is it</b>
<b>from…….to…?</b>
_<b>About…….meters/k</b>
<b>ilometers</b>.


Ex:


How far is it from
your house to
school?


•About one


kilometer.


+ <b>How do/does S+</b>
<b>V..?</b>


_<b>S +V ….by +</b>



<b>(means</b> <b>of</b>


<b>transport)</b>


Ex:


• How do you go to
school?


• I go to school by
bike.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Corrects the mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering some questions .



+What your name?
+Where do your live?


+How far is it from your house to hospital?
+How do you go to there?


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes


_Asks one student to tell way of asking and answering
the distance and how people go to somwhere.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractice the dialogue.
+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit1 B 6,7.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Correct
_Work in
pairs


_Roleplay
_Correct
_Do as
directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen



<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>







<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>LESSON 5</b> <b>: B _NAMES AND ADDRESSES (B6,7)</b>
<b>Period </b> <b>: 6</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>



<b>_ Language content: </b>


+To help the students continue the way of asking and answering about the distance of two
places.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the distance of
two places.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students care arounding people.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+ How far is it from…….to…….? _About…….meters/kilometers


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>


<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Groupwork .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 1 –B6,7


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit1 B4,5


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>



<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.Presenta</b>
<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 1:BACK TO SCHOOL</b>


<b>B_NAMES AND ADDRESSES (B6,7)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Using pictures:</b>


_Gives the situations and asks the students some
questions:


_Listen
and


<b>UNIT1: BACK TO</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 5:</b>


<b>B_NAMES AND</b>


<b>ADDRESSES</b>
<b>(B6,7)</b>


<b>Period 6:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


+What is this??


+How many places are there in the picture?
+What are they?


<b>_</b>Introduces the the content of the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Revision the places by using the pictures.
+School


+Post office
+Market
+Theater
+Distance


_Asks the students some questions:
+Is Lan’s house near/far from school?



+Is Lan’s house near the market/the post office/the
theater?


_Reminds the students of the structure:
+ How far is it from……to….?


_Says :” You will hear 4 conversations and find out the
distance between the places mentioned in the tape.”


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B6</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the tape one time and do
the exercise.


_Has the students listen one more and continue to
complete the exercise.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
answers.


_Calls some students to remark their friends’answers.
_Plays the tape sentence by sentence to check the
students’answers.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) School to Lan’s house:


300 meters


b) Lan’s house to post office:
700 meters.


c) School to movie theater:
3 kilometers.


d) Movie theater to post office:
2 kilometers.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering some questions .


+What your name?
+Where do your live?


answer
the
questions
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen


and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


_Listen
and do the
exercise
_Do as
directed
_Write
their
answers
_Remark
_Check
their
answers
_Listen
and copy


_Work in
pairs


a) School to Lan’s
house:


300 meters


b) Lan’s house to


post office:


700 meters.


c) School to movie
theater:


3 kilometers.


d) Movie theater to
post office:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


+How far is it from your house to hospital?
+How do you go to there?


_Has the students fill in the survey form in B7 on page
18.


_Calls some students to read their surveys before the
class.



_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson
_Asks the students to:


+Redo the exercise.


+Learn by heart the way of asking the distance
between two places.


+Prepare the new lesson Unit2 A1,2,3
_Remarks the students’study.


_Do the
survey
_Read
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>







<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b>---UNIT 2</b> <b>: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 7</b>


<b>Date of preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>


<b>+ </b>To help the students read numbers from 0 to 9 and to be able to read difficult double numbers such
as 00,88,11,33…


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone numbers
of them and their friends,and recognize the correct phone number through listening task.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>



+ To make the students care arounding people.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Telephone number, Call, Soon,Telephone Directory.


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+ What is your telephone number?
+ My phone number is…….


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Using pictures,Realia .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 2 –A1,2,3


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit1 B 6,7


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>



<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>
<b>A_TELEPHONE NUMBERS (A1,2,3)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Using pictures:</b>


<b>UNIT2</b> <b>:</b>


<b>PERSONAL</b>
<b>INFORMATION </b>
<b>LESSON 1:</b>


<b>A_ TELEPHONE</b>
<b>NUMBERS(A1,2,3)</b>
<b>Period 7:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


_Shows the picture in the book and asks the students :
+ What is this?


+Where is this page from?


_Sets the situation :”Nowadays, telephone has been
very popular in our social communication.Thus,it is
necessary for English learners to have a good skill of


using and understanding telephone in their study.Inthis
lesson,we will deal with these matters.”


<b>_</b>Introduces the the content of the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Telephone number(n) [Example]
+Call (v) [Mime]


+Soon (adv) [Translation]


+Telephone Directory (n) [Realia]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using the technique “Rub Out And Remember”


_Introduces the way of asking the telephone number
and answer the question:


+ What is your telephone number?
+ My phone number is…….


_Explains the way of reading the telephone number


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1.</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the tape one time .


_Has the students listen and repeat after the tape.
_Asks the students to practise A1.


_Calls some students to read the A1.
_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>A2.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape and write the
numbers they hear.(The teacher plays three times)
_Asks the students to compare their numbers.
_Calls some students to write their answers.
_Gives feedback.


* Answers:


a) 8 251 654 b) 8 250 541
c) 8 251 936 d) 8 351 793
e) 8 237 041 f) 7 821 652


<b>A3</b>.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape (A3) one time
and focus on the pronunciation and stress.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.



_Listen
and
answer
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen
_Listen
the tape
_Do as
directed
_Practise
_Read
_Correct
_Listen
and write
_Compare
_Write
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


and focus
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
+Telephone


number(n) số điện
thoại


+To Call (v) Goïi


+Soon (adv)


Ngay,sớm
+Telephone


Directory (n) Danh
bạ điện thoại


II.Structures:


+ What is your
telephone number?
+ My phone number
is…….


III.Answers:
A2.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>(7ms)</b>



<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering their own telephone number.


_Calls some students to practise before the class.
_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson
_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart the way of asking and answering the
telephone number.


+Prepare the new lesson Unit2 A4,5
_Remarks the students’study.


_Correct
_Work in
pairs


_Practise
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 8</b>



<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>


<b>+ </b>To help the students ask and answer the telephone numbers and know how to make an
arrangement.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the telephone
numbers of them and their friends,make an arrangement and form the simple future tense.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students know how to make an arrangement.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Will,Meet,Let,Free,Start Late,See a movie.


<b>b. Structures:</b>


+Will you be free….+Time?
+What time will it…..?
+ Let’s meet (at) + time ?
+Where will we meet?



<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to make an arrangement with their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Groupwork,Using pictures.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 2 –A4,5


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit2 A1,2,3


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>



<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>
<b>A_TELEPHONE NUMBERS (A4,5)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>UNIT2:</b>
<b>PERSONAL</b>
<b>INFORMATION </b>
<b>LESSON 2:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>* Using pictures:</b>


_Shows the picture in the book and asks the students :
+ Who are they in the picture?


+ What are they doing?


+ What are they talking about? Can you guess?
_Introduces the new lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Will (v) [Translation]


+Meet (v) [Translation/Example]
+Let (v) [Translation]


+Free (a) [Translation/Example]
+Start (v) [Translation]


+Late(a) [Example]


+See a movie : [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by


using the technique “Slap The Board”


_Introduces the way of inviting:
+ Would you like to…..?


Ex: Would you like to come to my house?


_Introduces the way of arranging the place to meet.
+ Where will we meet?


_Introduces the way of suggesting doing things.
+Let’s meet at……


_Introduces the simple future tense:
+ S + Will + V.


+ S + Will not(Won’t)
+ Will + S + V ?
Yes, S +Will.
No, S + Won’t.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A4.</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the tape and focus on
their pronunciation .


_Has the students work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.



_Calls some pairs to roleplay the dialogue.
_Corrects their pronunciation.


_Asks the students to work in groups and answer the
questions.


_Calls some students to read their answers.
_Corrects their mistakes.


*Answers:


a) Phong and Tam


b) They will see a movie.
c) They will meet at 6.45.


d) They will meet in front of the theater.


_Listen
and
answer
_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as


directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen
the tape
_Do as
directed
_Roleplay
_Correct
_Work in
groups
_Read
_Correct
<b>Period 8:</b>
I.New words:
+ Will (v) Sẽ
+ Meet (v) Gặp
+ Let (v) Để
+ Free (a) Tự do
+ Start (v) Bắt đầu
+ Late(a) Muộn,trễ
+ See a movie :
Xem phim


II.Structures:


+ Would you like
to…..?


Ex: Would you like


to come to my
house?


+ Where will we
meet?


+Let’s meet at……
*The simple future
tense:


+ S + Will + V.
+ S + Will not
(Won’t)


+ Will + S + V ?
Yes, S +Will.
No, S + Won’t.
III.Answers:
A4.


a) Phong and Tam
b) They will see a
movie.


c) They will meet at
6.45.


d) They will meet in
front of the theater.
A5.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>A5</b>


_Instructs the students the task of the exercise.


_Has the students listen to the tape and fill in the
blanks with the information they have heard.


_Asks the students to compare their answers.
_Calls some students to read their answers.
_Gives feedback.


* Answers:


a) 8 545 545 b) A movie
c) Lan’s house. d) Bus


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>



_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
following dialogue using their information.


A: Hello.This is 8 545 545.
B: Hello .Is this ……?


A: Yes. Who is calling,please?


B: It’s ……. Do you want to go to see a movie?
A: Sure.Where will we meet?


B: At………..


B:How will we get there?
B: We can take……….
A:O.K,fine.Bye.
B: Bye


_Calls some pairs to practise before the class.
_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson
_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart new words.


+Prepare the new lesson Unit2 B1,2,3
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen
_Listen
and do as


directed
_Compare
_Read
_Listen


_Work in
pairs


_Roleplay
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 9</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>


<b>+ </b>To introduce the students the ordinal numbers,months,and dates in a month.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to use the ordinal numbers,months,and
dates in a month in life.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students know the importance of time.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> First,Second,Third,Fourth,Fifth,….


<b>b. Structures:</b>



<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to use time logically.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Groupwork


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 2 –B1,2,3


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 2 A4,5


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>



<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>
<b>B_MY BIRTHDAY(B1,2,3)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Sets the situation by asking the students some
questions:


+How many days are there in a month?



+We use the ordinal numbers or cardinal numbers to
express days in a month?


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions


<b>UNIT2:</b>
<b>PERSONAL</b>
<b>INFORMATION </b>
<b>LESSON 3:</b>


<b>B_MY BIRTHDAY</b>
<b>(B1,2,3)</b>


<b>Period 9:</b>


I.Ordinal numbers:
(See in the
textbook)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


_Introduces the new lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>



<b>_Teaches ordinal numbers:</b>


<b>_</b>Explains the students how to form the ordinal
numbers:


+ Ordinal numbers = Cardinal numbers+th.
+ Notes:


First (1st<sub>)</sub>


Second (2nd<sub>)</sub>


Third (3rd<sub>)</sub>


Fifth (5th<sub>)</sub>


Ninth(9th<sub>)</sub>


Twelfth(12th<sub>)</sub>


Twentieth(20th<sub>)</sub>


+Explains the students how to pronunce the
ending-“th”


_Checks the students’ understanding of ordinal
numbers by using the technique “Slap The Board”


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


<b>B1.</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the tape and focus on the
pronunciation .


_Asks the students to listen and repeat after the teacher
_Has the students practise ordinal numbers.


_Calls some students to read the ordinal numbers.
_Corrects their pronunciation.


<b>B2.</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to look at B2 And ask:
+ What is this?


_Has the students to listen to the conversation
containing the dates of July (in B2) and write the
numbers they hear.


_Plays the first time and the students do as directed.
_Plays the second time and asks the students to do the
rest.


_Asks some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Lets the students to listen to the tape for the last time
and check their answers.



_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


The first of July.
The nineteenth
The sixth
The fourteenth


_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down


_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
the tape
_Repeat
_Practise
_Read
_Correct
_Listen
and
answer
_Listen
and do as


directed
_Do the
exercise
_Do the
rest
_Read
their
answers
_Check
_Copy


Cardinal
numbers+th.
+ Notes:
First (1st<sub>)</sub>


Second (2nd<sub>)</sub>


Third (3rd<sub>)</sub>


Fifth (5th<sub>)</sub>


Ninth(9th<sub>)</sub>


Twelfth(12th<sub>)</sub>


Twentieth(20th<sub>)</sub>


II.Answers:
B2.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


The seventeenth
The thirty-first


<b>B3.</b>


_Reminds the students of months in a year by asking
the students:


+How many months are there in a year?
_Calls some students to read the months.


_Asks the students to work in groups and rearrange the
mixed months.


_Calls some students to read their answers.
_Gives feedback


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>



_Asks the students to read some following dates and
months:


+ 20th<sub> ,September, 2004.</sub>


+ 15th<sub> ,November,1990.</sub>


+ 17th<sub> ,May,1999.</sub>


+ 12th<sub> ,August,2001.</sub>


_Corrects the students’mistakes.


_Asks one student to tell the way of forming ordinal
numbers and months in a year.


_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart ordinal numbers and months.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit2 B4,5


_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen
and
answer
_Read
_Work in
groups


_Read
_Correct
_Do the
exercise


_Listen
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<b> LESSON 4 : B_MY BIRTHDAY (B4,5)</b>
<b> Period : 10 </b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce some new words relating to personal information.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> To help the students know the way how to ask and answer about their
relatives’birthday .


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students know how to give their personal information to the others well.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Date of birth =Birthday ; Nervous ; To worry.


<b>b. Structures:</b> The simple present tense


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing to ask and answer about persional information.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach



<b>2. Techniques:</b> Preparation, Explanation ,Gap filling


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 2 –B4,5


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b>
<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b> Write some ordinal numbers .


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b> first ; second ; third ; twenty- fifth.


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT2: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>
<b>LESSON3 :B_MY BIRTHDAY(B4,5)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Chatting:</b>


_Shows the pictures and asks the students some questions:
+ Who’s this?


+ What are they doing?


_Says:”In order to know what they are talking about,let’s
study the dialogue.”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


_Listen
and
answer
_Listen


_Listen


<b>UNÌT2:</b>
<b>PERSONAL</b>
<b></b>
<b>INFORM-ATION</b>
<b>LESSON</b>
<b>3:B_MY</b>
<b>BIRTHDAY</b>
<b>(B4,5)</b>


<b>Period 10:</b>


I.New words:
+Date of birth (n)
=Birthday


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


+Date of birth (n) [synonym](=Birthday)
+Nervous (a) [Explanation]



+To worry (v) [mime]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Slap The Board”


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


_Has the students read through the dialogue.


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue without looking
their books.(Focus on their pronunciation and stress)


_Lets the students work in pairs and practise the dialogue.
_Calls some students to roleplay before the class


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to read the dialogue again and answer
the questions in their books.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students work in pairs and practise the dialogue
similar to B4,using their personal information.



_Calls some pairs to practise before the class.


_Asks the students to read the dialogue again and
complete the form in B5 (page 26).


<b>Student Registration Form</b>


Name:………….


Date of Birth:………
Address:………


Telephone number:…………..


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson.
_Asks the students to:


+Rewrite the answers to the questions of B4
+Copy the Form in B5


+Learn bby heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


and
repeat
_Copy
down


_Listen
and do as
directed
_Read the
dialogue
_Listen
and focus
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Read
and
answer
_Read
_Correct
_Work in
pairs
_Practise
_Listen
and do as
directed


_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy


_Listen



II.Answers:
a)Hoa is 13 years
old.


b)She will be 14
on her next
birthday.


c)Her birthday is
on June eighth.
d)Hoa lives with
her uncle and
aunt.


e)Hoa is worried
because she
doesn’t have any
friends.


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


---
---
---
---
---




UNIT 2 <b>: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To help the students master the dates of a month.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to fill out an invitation card.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students have good relationship with their friends.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Party,Invite,Start,Finish,Hope,Join,Fun.


<b>b. Structures:</b> The simple future tense


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>



_Knowing to write an invitation card to their friends..


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approac


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Gap-Filling,Using Pictures.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 2 –B6,7


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 2-B4,5


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>_</b> Asks two students to roleplay the dialogue B4 and then fill out the form B5


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


_Corrects the students’ mistakes


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms)</b>
<b>Teaching</b>



<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT2: PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>
<b>LESSON 4 :MY BIRTHDAY PARTY (B6,7)</b>
<b>Period 11</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


_Asks the students to look at the pictures in their books and
asks them some questions:


+What are they doing?
+What is Lan doing?



_Sets the scene:”We are going to read a text about Lan and
her birthday party.”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Party(n) [Picture]


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions
_Listen
_Listen
and


<b>UNÌT2:</b>
<b>PERSONAL</b>
<b></b>
<b>INFORM-ATION</b>


<b>LESSON :B6,7</b>
<b>Period 11</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


+To invite(v) [Translation]


+To start(v) [Explanation]
+To finish(v) [Explanation]
+To hope(v) [Translation]
+To join(v) [Translation]
+Fun(n) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by using
“Slap The Board”


_Asks the students to read the text and then answer the
questions :


+ How old is she now?
+ Where does he live?
+ When is her birthday?


+When will the party start and finish?
_Gives the answers.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


_Has the students read through the text (B6) in silence .
_Asks the students to listen to the text without looking their
books.(Focus on their pronunciation and stress)


_Calls some students to read the text before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to work in pairs , read the text again and
complete the invitation card to Lan’s Party.



_Calls some students to read their answers before the class.
_Gives feedback.


*Answers:


1) Sunday,May 25th<sub> .</sub>


2) 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street.
3) 5:00 …….9:00


4) Lan


_Guides the students how to do the exrcise B7:”Imagine you
will be a guest at Lan’s party.What will you do? (Guides the
students to answer the questions in B7)”


_Asks the students to work in groups of 8 and discuss what
they will do.


_Notices the students use the simple future tense.
S + WILL + Vbare in finitive


_Calls some students to answer the questions before the
class.


_Corrects the students if necessary


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>



<b>_</b>Hangs a chart on the board( The form of an invitation card
as in B6)


_Has the students work in groups of 8 and fill in the blanks


repeat
_Copy
down


_Listen
and do as
directed
_Read the
dialogue
and
answer
the
questions
_Listen
and focus
_Read
_Listen
_Read
before the
class
_Listen
_Complet
-e the
card
_Read


_Listen
and
correct


_Listen
and do as
directed
_Work in
groups
_Listen
_Answer
the
questions
_Listen
_Listen
and do as


B6:


1) Sunday,May
25th<sub> .</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>



by using their own information.


_Calls some students to read their invitation card before the
class.


_Reminds the students the form of an invitation card:
*Salutation:Dear……….,(sent person’s name)


*Body of the letter :


+Time and place of the party taking place.
+ Starting and ending time of the party.
*Complimentary close: Love.(Yours…….)
*Signature: The writer’s name


_Asks the students to:


+Rewrite the invitation card in B7 in their notebooks
+Learn the form of an invitation card by heart
+Learn by heart the new words.


+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


directed
_Read
_Listen


_Listen
and copy



_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>



---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>


<b> LESSON : A _ WHAT A LOVELY HOME!(A1)</b>
<b> Period : 12 </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To help the students make a complaint,give a compliment ,describe rooms and
homes,furniture and appliances,and give their location.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to introduce different rooms in a
house,the names of the furniture,and appliances


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the tidiness and cleaness in their house.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Awful,Comfortable,Tub,Shower,Dryer,Sink,Convenient,Modern,Lovely.


<b>b. Structures:</b> Exclaimatory sentences (Complaint and compliments)


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing to how to put things in the right places.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting .



<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson A:What a lovely home!(1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 2-B6,7


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks one student to read the form of an invitation card.


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


*Salutation:Dear……….,(sent person’s name)
*Body of the letter :


+Time and place of the party taking place.
+ Starting and ending time of the party.
*Complimentary close: Love.(Yours…….)
*Signature: The writer’s name


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>



<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’Activ</b>
<b>ities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 1 :A_WHAT A LOVELY HOME! (A1)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Chatting:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions to lead them to the
content of the lesson.


+ How many rooms are there in your house?


_Listen and
answer the
questions



<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


<b>LESSON</b> <b>1</b>


<b>A_WHAT A</b>
<b>LOVELY</b>


<b>HOME! (A1)</b>
<b>Period 12</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


+What are they?


+What are there in each room?


_Shows the picture in the book and asks the students to
call names of them.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ Awful(a) [Mime]
+ Comfortable(a) [Translation]
+ Lovely(a) [Translation]
+ Modern(a) [Explanation]


+ Tub(n) [Picture]
+ Shower(n) [Picture]
+ Dryer(n) [Picture]
+ Sink(n) [Picture]
+ Dishwasher(n) [Picture]
+ Convenient(a) [Translation]
+ Amazing (a) [Translation]
+Refrigerator(n) [Picture]
+Would you like….. [Translation]
+To be at work: [Translation]
+To go shopping/shop [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Introduces the students the Exclaimatory sentence:
WHAT+A/AN+ADJ+NOUN!


* Complaint:


Ex: What an awful day!
* Compliments:


What a bright room!


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


_Has the students listen to the dialogue one time and
focus on pronunciation and stress.



_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to read the dialogue again and
answer the questions in their books.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) The living room, Hoa’s(bed) room, and the kitchen.
b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors:Pink and
white.


c) A sink, a tub, and a shower.


d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a
dishwasher,and an electric stove.


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down



_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy down


_Listen and
focus


_Work in pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Read and
answer
_Read their
answers
_Listen and
correct
+ Comfortable(a)
+Lovely(a)
+Modern(a)
+Tub(n)
+Shower(n)
+Dryer(n)
+Sink(n)
+Dishwasher(n)
+Convenient(a)
+Amazing (a)
+Refrigerator(n)
+Would you
like…..



+To be at work:


+To go


shopping / shop
II.Answers:
a) The living
room, Hoa’s(bed)
room, and the
kitchen.


b) Because it is
bright and it has
nice colors:Pink
and white.


c) A sink, a tub,
and a shower.
d) A washing
machine,a


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>



<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students play the game “Networks”


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson
before the class.


_Asks the students to:


+Rewrite the answers to the questions of B4
+Copy the Form in B5


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Play the game


_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>



---


---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>


<b> LESSON 2 : A _ WHAT A LOVELY HOME!(A2,3)</b>
<b> Period : 13 </b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>


kitchen Living


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To help the students make a complaint,give a compliment ,describe rooms and
homes,furniture and appliances,and give their location.



<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to make a complaint , a
compliment,and use the struture “There is/are….”


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the things around them.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Wet,Boring,Dress,Movie,Bright,Lovely,Delicious,Great.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ Exclaimatory sentences (Complaint and compliments)
+What a/an + Noun!


+What + Nouns!
_There is/are…….


Is/are there……? No,There isn’t/aren’t.
Yes,There is/are.
+Where is it? It is +Preposition+ Place.


+Where are they? They are+Preposition+ Place


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing to how to express their feelings.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach



<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson A:What a lovely home!(2,3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 3-A1


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks one student to read the text and answer the questions in the book.


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


a) The living room, Hoa’s(bed) room, and the kitchen.
b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors:Pink and white.
c) A sink, a tub, and a shower.


d) A washing machine,a dryer,a refrigerator,a dishwasher,and an electric stove.



<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’Activ</b>
<b>ities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 2 :A_WHAT A LOVELY HOME! (A2,3)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>
<b>(8ms)</b>
<b>(12ms)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>



<b>_</b>Says some sentences to lead the stusents to the
content of the lesson.


+Your shirt is very beautiful.
+Your shoes are very beautiful.
_Says another way.


+What a beautiful shirt!
+What beautiful shoes!
_Introduces the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Wet (a) [Explaination]
+Boring(a) [Explaination]
+Dress (n) [Realia]
+Movie [Explaination]
+Bright(a) [Translation]
+Lovely (a) [Translation]
+Delicious (a) [Translation]
+Great (a) [Translation]
+In[Translation]


+On [Translation]
+Under [Translation]
+Near [Translation]
+Next to [Translation]
+Behind [Translation]
+In front of [Translation]



_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Introduces the students the Exclaimatory sentence:
WHAT+A/AN+ADJ+NOUN!


* Complaint:


Ex: What an awful day!
* Compliments:


What a bright room!
_Introduces the structure
+Thereis + Noun (Singular)….
Ex: There is a table.


+There are + Noun (Plural)….
Ex: There are tables.


_Introduces the question of positions.
+Where is it? It is +Preposition+ Place.


+Where are they? They are+Preposition+ Place


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A2</b>


_Has the students work in pairs and do the
exercise(A2) in the book.



_Listen and


guess the
lesson
_Listen and
focus
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy down


_Work in pairs


<b>A_WHAT A</b>
<b>LOVELY</b>
<b>HOME! (A2,3)</b>
<b>Period 13</b>
I.New words:
+Wet (a)
+Boring(a)
+Dress (n)
+Movie
+Bright(a)
+Lovely (a)
+Delicious (a)


+Great (a)
+In
+On
+Under
+Near
+Next to
+Behind
+In front of
II.Structures
_Exclaimatory
sentences


(Complaint and
compliments)
+
What a/an +
Noun!



+What + Nouns!
_T
here is/are…….
+I
s/are there……?
No,There


isn’t/aren’t.
Yes,There is/are.
_ Places of
things



+Where is it? It
is +Preposition+
Place.


+
Where are they?
They


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


_Asks the students to compare their sentences


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.
*Answers:


a)


1) What an awful restaurant!
2)What a wet day!


3)What a boring party!
4)What a bad movie!
b)



1)What a great party!
2)What a bright room!


3)What an interesting movie!
4)What a lovely house!
5)What a delicious dinner!
6)What a beautiful day!
<b>A3a</b>


_Asks the students to look at the picture in the book
and say the names of things and count the numbers.
_Has the students do the exercise A3a in the
book,using the structure”There is/are…”


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.


<b>A3b</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to make questions from the
sentences they have made above and answer Yes/No.
_Calls some students to read their sentences before the
class.


_Asks the students to say the positions of them.


_Has the students asks and answer by using the


question”Where is it? ;Where are they?”


_Calls some students to read their sentences.
_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students make complaint some things
+ Awful day


+ Bad story
+ Boring film


_Calls some students to write their sentences on the
board.


_Corrects their mistakes.


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson
before the class.


_Asks the students to:


_Compare
_Write their
answers
_Correct


_Work in pairs
_Roleplay


_Read the
answers
_Listen


_Work in pairs
_Read their
answers


_Listen and do
a s directed
_Read their
answers
_Correct


_Do as directed


_Write the
sentences
_Correct
_Tell the
content of the


II.Answers:
A2


a)


1) What an awful
restaurant!



2)What a wet
day!


3)What a boring
party!


4)What a bad
movie!


b)


1)What a great
party!


2)What a bright
room!


3)What an


interesting
movie!


4)What a lovely
house!


5)What a


delicious dinner!


6)What a



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


+Learn by heart the new words and structures.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


lesson
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>



---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


---
---
---
---
---
---
---




UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>


<b> LESSON : B-HOA’S FAMILY(B1)</b>
<b> Period : 14 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words relating to the topic”Hoa’s Family”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about jobs.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Farm,Countryside,Housework,Grow Vegetables,Raise Cattle,Busy,,Photo.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ What + do/does + S + do?
_ What do/does + S + work?



<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Making them love their countryside.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting,Translation,Realia .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson B:Hoa’family(B1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 3-A2,3


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks one student to go to the board and make exclaimation sentences,using the following words:
+ Beautiful car.


+ Nice day.


+ Good person.


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


+What a beautiful car!
+ What a nice day!
+ What a good person!


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’Activ</b>
<b>ities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 3 :B_ HOA’S FAMILY(B1)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>



<b>* Chatting:</b>


<b>_</b>Says some sentences to lead the stusents to the
content of the lesson.


+What do your parents do?
+Where do they work?


_Shows the picture in the book and ask the students to


_Listen and


guess the


lesson


<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 3 </b>


<b>B_</b> <b>HOA’S</b>


<b>FAMILY(B1)</b>
<b>Period 14</b>


I.New words:
+Farm (n) Nông
dân



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>


guess who they are.
_Introduces the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Farm (n) [Picture]


+Countryside (n) [Example]
+Housework (n) [Example]
+Grow Vegetables [Translation]
+Raise Cattle [Translation]
+Busy (a) [Translation]
+Photo (n) [Realia]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Introduces the students the way of asking jobs:
+ What + do/does + S + do?



+ What do/does + S + work?
+ S + to be……..


Ex: What do you do?
I am a teacher.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape carefully and focus
on their pronunciation and stress.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.


_Has the students read the dialogue again and then find
the answers.


_Asks the students to compare their sentences


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.
*Answers:


a) He’s a farmer,



b) He works on his farm.
c) She’s a housewife.


d) She does housework and she helps on the farm.
e)Yes,they are.(Because they love working on their
farm)


f) She is 8.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students play the game “Net work”


_Asks the students to tell the structure of asking jobs
before the class.


_Listen
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Work in pairs
_Roleplay


_Read the
dialogue
_Compare
_Write their
answers
_Correct
_Work in
groups


_Do as directed


Miền quê


+Housework (n)
Việc nhà


+Grow
Vegetables
:Trồng rau


+Raise Cattle
:Nuôi gia súc
+Busy (a) Bận
rộn


+Photo (n) Bức
ảnh


II.Structures
+ What +


do/does + S + do?
+ What do/does
+ S + work?
+ S + to be……..
Ex: What do you
do?


I am a
teacher.


II.Answers:
a) He’s a farmer,
b) He works on
his farm.


c) She’s a
housewife.


d) She does
housework and
she helps on the
farm.


e)Yes,they are.
(Because they
love working on
their farm)


f) She is 8.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart the new words and structures.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>



---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


---
---
---
---
---
---


UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>


<b> LESSON : B _ HOA’S FAMILY(B2)</b>
<b> Period : 15 </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic”Hoa’s Family”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about jobs.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Doctor,Hospital,Take Care Of,Primary School,Journalist,Newspaper,Teach.Write.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ What + do/does + S + do?
_ What do/does + S + work?
_ S +is/am/are ………


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>



_Making them love their family.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting,Translation,Realia.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson B:Hoa’family(B2)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 3-B1


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks two students to go to the board , practise the dialogue and then answer the questions
+What does Hoa’s father do?


+ Where does he work?


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>



_Corrects their mistakes.
+ He is a farmer.


+ He works on the farm.


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 3 :B_ HOA’S FAMILY(B2)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Chatting:</b>



<b>_</b>Shows the pictures in the book and asks the stusents
some questions:


+What does he do?
+What does she do?
+ What does he do?
_Introduces the lesson.


_Listen and
answer


_Listen and


<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 4</b>


<b>B_</b> <b>HOA’S</b>


<b>FAMILY(B2)</b>
<b>Period 15</b>


I.New words:
+Doctor (n) Bác


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b>(8ms)</b>
<b>(12ms)</b>
<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Doctor (n) [Picture]
+Hospital (n) [Example]
+To take care of: [Translation]
+Primary School (n) [Picture]
+Journalist (n) [Translation]
+Newspaper (n) [Realia]
+To teach. (v) [Mime]
+To write (v) [Mime]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Reminds the students of the way of asking jobs:
+ What + do/does + S + do?


+ What do/does + S + work?
+ S + to be……..


Ex: What do you do?
I am a teacher.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B2</b>



_Has the students listen to the tape carefully and focus
on their pronunciation and stress.


_Asks the students to practise the text.


_Calls some students to read the text before the class.
_Has the students read the text again and then find the
answers.


_Asks the students to compare their sentences


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.
*Answers:


a) Her father is a doctor.
b) He works in a hospital.
c) Her mother is a teacher.


d) She works in a primary school.
e) Her brother is a journalist.
f) He woks in a Ha Noi newspaper.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students work in pairs and practise asking and
answering about their family.



_Calls some pairs to go to the board and practise
before the class.


_Asks the students to tell the structure of asking jobs
before the class.


_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart the new words and structures.


guess
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Practise
_Read before
the class


_Read and find
the answers
_Compare


_Write their
answers
_Correct


_Work in pairs
_Do as directed
_Tell the
structure
_Listen and


+To take care of:
Chăm sóc


+Primary School
(n) Trưòng tiểu
học


+Journalist (n)
Phóng viên
+Newspaper (n)
Tờ báo


+To teach. (v)
Dạy


+To write (v)
Viết


II.Structures
+ What +


do/does + S + do?
+ What do/does
+ S + work?
+ S + to be……..
Ex: What do you
do?


I am a
teacher.


II.Answers:
a) Her father is a
doctor.


b) He works in a
hospital.


c) Her mother is
a teacher.


d) She works in a
primary school.
e) Her brother is
a journalist.
f) He woks in a


Ha Noi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>



+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study. copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>



---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>



<b> LESSON : B _ HOA’S FAMILY(B3,4)</b>
<b> Period : 16</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic”Hoa’s Family”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to definite some jobs and listen to
for details then fill in the blanks.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students the values of labour.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> High school,Magazine.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ What + do/does + S + do?
_ What do/does + S + work?
_ S +is/am/are ………


_ Where do/does +S + work?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Making them love studying.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Network, Translation



<b> 3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson B:Hoa’family(B3,4)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 3-B2


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks one student to go to the board , read the text(B2) and then answer the questions
+What does Lan’s father do?


+ Where does he work?


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


_Corrects their mistakes.
+ He is a doctor.


+ He works in a hospital.


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>



<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 5 :B_ HOA’S FAMILY(B3,4)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Network:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to list the jobs they have known.


_Introduces the lesson.


_Listen and
answer



_Listen and


<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 5</b>


<b>B_</b> <b>HOA’S</b>


<b>FAMILY(B3,4)</b>
<b>Period 16</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ High school (n) [Translation]
+ Magazine (n) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Reminds the students of the way of asking jobs:
+ What + do/does + S + do?


+ What do/does + S + work?
+ S + to be……..



Ex: What do you do?
I am a teacher.


_Reminds the students of the way of asking where a
person works:


+ Where do/does +S +work?
+ S + Work(s) ………


_Asks the students somes questions:
+ Where does a farmer work?
+ Where does a teacher work?
+ Where does a journalist work?


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B3</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students work in pairs and match the column
A with the column B.


_Calls some students to read their answers.
_Gives feedback.


* Answers:


+ A farmer works on a farm.


+ A doctor takes care of sick people.
+ A journalist writes for a newspaper.


+ A teacher teaches in a school.


<b>B4</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the students some meanings of words in
these forms:


+ Name: Teân
+ Age:Tuổi


+ Job: Nghề nghiệp


+Place of work :Nơi làm việc


<b>_</b>Introduces the students the way of doing this exercise.
_Has the students listen to the tape carefully and fill in
the blanks with the information they have listened.
_Asks the students to listen to the second times and do
the rest of the exercise.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Has the students listen the tape again and then find


guess
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and do


as directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
answer


_Work in pairs
_Read before
the class
_Correct
_Listen
_Listen and
focus
_Listen


_Listen and do
the rest


_Read their
answers


+ Magazine (n)
Tạp chí


II.Structures
+ What +
do/does + S + do?
+ What do/does


+ S + work?
+ S + to be……..
Ex: What do you
do?


I am a
teacher.


_The way of
asking where a
person works:
+ Where do/does
+S +work?


+ S + Work(s)
………


II.Answers:
3.Matching:
+ A farmer works
on a farm.


+ A doctor takes
care of sick
people.


+ A journalist
writes for a
newspaper.
+ A teacher


teaches in a
school.


4.Complete these
forms:


a)


Name : Tom
Age : 26
Job : Teacher
Place of work :
At a high school.
b)


Name : Susan
Age : 19
Job : Journalist
Place of work :
For a magazine
c)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>



the correct answers.
_Gives the answers:
*Answers:


a)


Name : Tom
Age : 26
Job : Teacher


Place of work : At a high school.
b)


Name : Susan
Age : 19
Job : Journalist


Place of work : For a magazine
c)


Name : Bill
Age : 20
Job : Nurse


Place of work : In a hospital


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Has the students work in pairs and practise asking and


answering some questions:


+What your name?
+How old are you?
+What do you do?
+Where do you work?


_Calls some pairs to go to the board and practise
before the class.


_Asks the students to tell the structures before the
class.


_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart the new words and structures.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and do
as directed
_Correcct


_Work in pairs


_Tell the
structures
_Listen and
copy



_Listen


Age : 20
Job : Nurse
Place of work : In
a hospital


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---


UNIT 3<b> : AT HOME</b>


<b> LESSON : B _ HOA’S FAMILY(B5)</b>
<b> Period : 17</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic”Hoa’s Family”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to use the comparative and
superlative well in reality.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Find,Empty,Apartment,Lovely,Furnished,Suitable,Modern.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ S1 + ToBe+Short Adjective +ER +Than + S2.
_ S1 + ToBe+More +Long Adjective +Than + S2.
_ S1 + ToBe+The +Short Adjective +EST +…….
_ S + ToBe+The +Most + Long Adjective +…….


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Making them love their hometown.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting,Translation,Realia.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 3:At Home .Lesson B:Hoa’family(B5)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.



<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 3-B3,4


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: (5ms)</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


_Asks two students to go to the board to ask and answer the questions:
+ What is your name?


+ How old are you?
+ What do you do?
+ Where do you work?


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>


<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 3: AT HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 6 :B_ HOA’S FAMILY(B5)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Chatting:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:


+ Do you like in a house or in an apartment?
+Which is more comfortable?


_Introduces the lesson.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


_Listen and


answer


_Listen and
guess


<b>UNÌT 3: AT</b>
<b>HOME</b>


<b>LESSON 6</b>


<b>B_</b> <b>HOA’S</b>


<b>FAMILY(B5)</b>
<b>Period 17</b>


I.New words:
+To Find (v) Tìm


+Empty (a)


Trống


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To Find (v) [Mime]
+Empty (a) [Translation]


+Apartment (n) [Picture]
+Lovely (a) [Example]
+Furnished (a) [Translation]
+Suitable (a) [Transaltion]
+Modern (a) [Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Reminds the students of comparative:


+ <b>S1 + ToBe+Short Adjective +ER +Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am taller than Hoa.


+ <b>S1 + ToBe+More +Long Adjective +Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am more beautiful than Hoa.
_Reminds the students of superlative:


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Short Adjective +EST +…….</b>


Ex: He is the tallest in my class.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Most + Long Adjective +….</b>


Ex: She is the most beautiful in my class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B5</b>



_Asks the students to listen to the tape and focus on the
pronunciation and stress.


_Has the students work in pairs to practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Asks the students work in groups to read the dialogue
again and answers the questions in the book.


_Asks the students to compare their answers.


<b>_</b>Has some students read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) The one at number 27.
b) The one at numer 79.
c) The one at numer 79.
d) The one at numer 27.


The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the
newest of the three apartments.It has two bedrooms,a
large modern badthroom and a kitchen.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>



_Has the students work in pairs ,using the words in the
box (B6) and then fill in the blanks in the letter.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Gives feedback.


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and do
as directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
focus


_Work in pairs
_Roleplay
_Read
_Compare
_Read their
answers before
the class
_Correct



_Work in pairs
_Read their
answers
Căn hộ
+Lovely (a)
Dễ thương
+Furnished (a)
Được trang bị nội
thất
+Suitable (a)
Thích hợp
+Modern (a)
Hiện đại
II.Structures
_ Comparative:


+ <b>S1 +</b>


<b>ToBe+Short</b>
<b>Adjective +ER</b>
<b>+Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am taller
than Hoa.


+ <b>S1 +</b>


<b>ToBe+More</b>
<b>+Long Adjective</b>
<b>+Than + S2.</b>



Ex: I am more
beautiful than
Hoa.


_Superlative:
+ <b>S + ToBe+The</b>
<b>+Short</b>


<b>Adjective +EST</b>
<b>+…….</b>


Ex: He is the
tallest in my
class.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The</b>
<b>+Most + Long</b>
<b>Adjective +….</b>


Ex: She is the
most beautiful in
my class.


II.Answers:
3.Matching:
+ A farmer works
on a farm.


+ A doctor takes


care of sick
people.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


1) Beautiful
2) Expensive
3) Cheapest
4) Small
5) Big
6) Best


_Asks the students to tell the structures before the
class.


_Asks the students to:


+Learn by heart the new words and structures.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


_Correcct


_Tell the


structures
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


newspaper.
+ A teacher
teaches in a
school.


4.Complete these
forms:


a)


Name : Tom
Age : 26
Job : Teacher
Place of work :
At a high school.
b)


Name : Susan
Age : 19
Job : Journalist
Place of work :
For a magazine
c)



Name : Bill
Age : 20
Job : Nurse
Place of work : In
a hospital


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>















</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 18</b>


<b>Date Of Preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date Of Teaching</b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes</b> <b>: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>



+To help the students review the vocabulary and structures form unit 1 to unit 3.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do exercises relating to the structures they have
learned.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To help students have their habit of revising the old lesson.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills.


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Knowing how to solve the exercises in the book.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Pictures, Revision,Questions and Answers,Make Sentences,Gap-Fill.


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Charts.



<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Language Focus”


<b>5. Previous exercises</b>: Unit 3 _ B :Hoa’s Family (5)


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization: (2ms)</b>
<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps And</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’ Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I. </b>


<b></b>


<b>Presenta-tion of the </b>
<b>new </b>
<b>materials</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>
<b>(15ms)</b>


<b>UNIT: LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<b>I. Lead -in:</b>


<b>1.Sets the situation:</b>


_Introduces the new lesson .


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>* Revision:</b>


_Reviews the students the simple present
tense:


_Listen
_Listen and
copy


<b>UNIT :LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>Period: 18</b>


I.Revision:



1)The simple presentt tense:


<b>+ Form</b>:


<b>S + Vs(es) </b>


Example:


•I often play soccer.
2) The simple future tense


<b>+ Form: </b>


<b> S +Will + V bare infinitive….</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>(16ms)</b>


<b>+ Form</b>: <b>S + Vs(es) </b>


Example: I often play soccer.


_Reminds the students of the simple future
tense


<b>+ Form: S +Will + V bare infinitive….</b>


Example: I will play soccer.


_Reminds the students of ordinal numbers.
• First,Second…….



_Reminds the students of prepositions:
+ Under:Ở dưới


+In front of # Behind:Phía sau
+Next to:Kế bên


+On :Ở trên


_Reminds the students of comparative and
superative:


+ <b>S1 + ToBe+Short Adjective +ER</b>
<b>+Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am taller than Hoa.


+ <b>S1 + ToBe+More +Long Adjective</b>
<b>+Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am more beautiful than Hoa.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Short Adjective +EST</b>
<b>+…….</b>


Ex: He is the tallest in my class.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Most + Long</b>
<b>Adjective +….</b>



Ex: She is the most beautiful in my class.
_Reminds the students of Ocupations:
+ <b>S + To Be a/an + Job.</b>


Ex: I am a teacher.


_Reminds the students of the structure:
+ <b>There is/are……..</b>


_Reminds the students of question words:
+How ,What,……


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>*Activity1:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the exercise 1 on page 38.


_Calls some students to read their
answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


a) is/lives/are/goes. b) are/eat/rides/catch.


<b>*Activity2:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the exercise 2 on page 38.



_Calls some students to read before the
class
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Work in
pairs
_Read before
the class
_Correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Read their
answers


•I will play soccer.
3) Ordinal numbers.
• First,Second…….
4) Prepositions:
+ Under:Ở dưới



+In front of # Behind:Phía sau
+Next to:Kế beân


+On :Ở trên


5) Comparative and
Superative:


+ <b>S1 + ToBe+Short</b>
<b>Adjective +ER +Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am taller than Hoa.
+ <b>S1 + ToBe+More +Long</b>
<b>Adjective +Than + S2.</b>


Ex: I am more beautiful than
Hoa.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Short</b>
<b>Adjective +EST +…….</b>


Ex: He is the tallest in my
class.


+ <b>S + ToBe+The +Most +</b>
<b>Long Adjective +….</b>


Ex: She is the most beautiful
in my class.



6) Ocupations:


+ <b>S + To Be a/an + Job.</b>


Ex: I am a teacher.
7.


+ <b>There is/are……..</b>


8) Question words:
+How ,What,……
II.Answers<b>:</b>
<b>1.</b>
a) is/lives/are/goes.
b) are/eat/rides/catch.
<b>2.</b>


+He will do his homework,but
he won’t tidy the yard.


+He will see a movie,but he
won’t watch T.V


+He will write to his
grandmother,but he won’t
meet Minh.


<b>3.</b>



+


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b></b>
<b>II.Conso-lidation</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_ Corrects their mistakes.
*Answers:


+He will do his homework,but he won’t
tidy the yard.


+He will see a movie,but he won’t watch
T.V


+He will write to his grandmother,but he
won’t meet Minh.


<b>* Activity 3:</b>


_Asks the students to write the ordinal
numbers on page 38.


_Calls some students to read their
answers.



* Answers:


+ First;Fourth;Fifth;Sixth;Third;Second
Seventh.


<b>* Activity 4:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the exercise 4 on page 39.


_Calls some students to go to the board
and write their answers.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) It’s under the table.
b) It’s in front of the chair.
c) It’s behind the T.V.
d) It’s next to the bookcase.
e) It’s on the couch.


_Asks one student to tell the content of the
lesson before the class.


_Asks the students to:


+ Do the exercises 5,6,7,8 in their books.
+ Redo the exercises in their workbooks.


+ Review for the next test


_Remarks the students’study


_Correct


_Listen and
do as directed
_Read their
answers


_Work in
pairs


_Write their
answers
_Correct


_Do as
directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen


Seventh.


<b>4.</b>


a) It’s under the table.
b) It’s in front of the chair.


c) It’s behind the T.V.
d) It’s next to the bookcase.
e) It’s on the couch.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 19</b>
<b>Date Of Preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date Of Teaching</b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes</b> <b>: 7A</b>



<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review knowledge they’ve learnt from unit 1 to unit 3.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+To enable the students to use previous knowledge to do the next test and through the test the teacher can
know the students’ knowledge.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To educate the students aware the importance of learning English and use it in communication.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Paying attention to learning English.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Multiple choice,Questions and answers,Rearrangement,Correction.



<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Papers


<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Test”


<b>5. Previous exercises :</b>”Language focus”


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization:</b>


<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Name:</b>……….. <b>Date:</b>……….


<b>Class : 7A</b> <b>Forty FiveTEST </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<b>MARK</b> <b>REMARKS</b>


<b>I.Multiple Choice: (3ms) (khoanh tròn đáp án đúng) </b>


1.Nice---see you. a.to b.for c.in



2.I’m in class 7A.---am I. a.So b.Too c.Either


3.---is your family name? a.How b.Which c.What


4.---do you live ? a.Where b.What c.Which


5.How---are you? a.age b.eld c.old


6.---is your middle name? a.Where b.Which c.What


7.How---is it from your house to school? a.near b.far c.farther


8.---do you go to school? a.What b.Where c.How


9.----is your telephone number? a.How b.What c.When


10.What is your---of birth? a.date b.day c.dates


11.What---awful day! a.a b.an c.the


12.There---a table. a.is b.are c.am


<b>II.Reading:(4ms) (Đọc đoạn văn sau,sau đó trả lời các câu hỏi phía dưới)</b>


Lan’s father is a doctor.He works in a hospital.He takes care of sick children.Her mother is a teacher.She teaches in a
primary school.Lan has an elder brother.He is a journalist.He writes for a Hanoi newspaper.Lan is a student.She studies at a
secondary school.


<b>Questions :</b>



13.What does Lan’s father do? 13………..


14.Where does he work? 14………..


15.What does Lan’s mother do? 15………..


16.Where does she work? 16………..


17.What does Lan’s brother do? 17………..


18.Where does he work? 18………..


19.What does Lan do? 19………..


20.Where does she study? 20………..


<b>III.Writing: (2ms)</b>


<b>A.Rearrange these words to make the correct senetences :(1,5 ms)</b>
<b>(Sắp xếp các từ thành câu có nghĩa)</b>


21. Is / there / book / a. 21. ………..


22.His / is / name / What ? 22. ………..


23.Am / taller / than / I / she. 23. ………..


<b>B.Make exclamation sentences : (Đặt câu cảm thán từ các từ cho sẵn) ( 1,5ms)</b>


Example : <i>nice cat</i> <i> What a nice cat !</i>



24.beautiful house. 24. ………..


25.awful restaurant. 25. ………..


26.goos boy. 26. ………..


<i>----The </i>


<b>end----ANSWERS OF TEST 1 (ENGLISH 7)</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>1</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>2</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>3</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>4</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>5</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>6</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>7</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>8</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>9</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>10</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>



<b>11</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>12</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>13</b> <b>Lan’s father is a doctor.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>14</b> <b>He works in a hospital.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>15</b> <b>Her mother is a teacher.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>16</b> <b>She teaches in a primary school.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>17</b> <b>Lan’s brother (He) is a journalist. </b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>18</b> <b>He writes for a Hanoi newspaper.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>19</b> <b>Lan is a student.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>20</b> <b>She studies at a secondary school.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>21</b> <b>There is a book.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>22</b> <b>What is his name?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>23</b> <b>I am taller than she.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>24</b> <b>What a beautiful house!</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>25</b> <b>What an awful restaurant!</b> <b>0,5</b>



<b>26</b> <b>What a good boy!</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>TOTAL</b> <b>10</b>


<b>THE QUALIFICATION TABLE</b>


<b> Classes</b> <b> Good</b> <b> Fair</b> <b> Average</b> <b> Weak</b> <b> Bad</b>
<b>7A1</b>


<b>7A2</b>
<b>7A3</b>
<b>7A4</b>
<b>7A5</b>
<b>7A6</b>


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>








<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 4</b> <b>: AT SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words relating to the topic “At School” and help them
know how to ask and answer about the time.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the time.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of time.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Quarter,Half,Past,To,Start, Finish,Get up, Have Lunch, Go to bed.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _What time is it?
_ It’s + Giờ.


_What time do/does +S +V ?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to save time.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 4:At School -Lesson 1 A: Schedules(1,2)



<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Test 1


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>



<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 1 :A_SCHEDULES (A1,2)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Chatting:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions to lead them to the
content of the lesson.


+ What time is it now?


+What time do you go to school?


_Shows the pictures in the book and asks the students to
say the time.


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


_Listen and
answer the
questions


_Listen and
answer


<b>UNIT 4: AT</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON</b> <b>1</b>


<b>A_SCHEDULES</b>
<b>(A1,2)</b>


<b>Period 20</b>


I.New words:


+Quarter =


Fifteen : mười lăm
phút


+Half = Thirty:Ba
mươi phút


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Quarter = Fifteen


+Half = Thirty
+Past [Translation]
+To [Translation]
+To Start = To Begin
+To Finish # To Start
+Get up (v) [Translation]
+To Have Lunch [Translation]
+Go to bed [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out and Remember”


_Introduces the students the way of asking time.
+What time is it?


_Introduces the students the way of answering:
* Giờ chẵn:


+ It’s + Số đếm+O’clock.
Ex: It’s ten o’clock.(10.0)
*Giờ lẻ:


Giờ hơn:


+It’s +Số phút +Past + Số giờ.
Ex: It’s ten past eleven.(11.10)
+It’s + Số giờ +Số phút.


Ex: It’s six forty five.(6.45)
Giờ kém:



+It’s + Số phút + To + Số giờ.
Ex: It’s twenty to five.


_Introduces the students the way of asking when a
person does.


+What time do/does +S +V ?


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) one time and
focus on pronunciation and stress.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise A1.
_Calls some students to read before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering the time.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


<b>A2.</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering the questions in A2.



_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
focus
_Work in
pairs
_Read
_Listen
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
+To :Keùm



+To Start = To
Begin:Bắt đầu
+To Finish # To
Start


+Get up (v) Thức
dậy


+To Have Lunch:
ăn trưa


+Go to bed :Đi ngủ
II.Structures:
_The way of
asking time.
+What time is it?
_ The way of
answering:


<b>* Giờ chẵn:</b>


+ It’s + Số
đếm+O’clock.
Ex: It’s ten
o’clock.(10.0)


<b>*Giờ lẻ:</b>
<b>Giờ hơn</b>:


+It’s +Số phút


+Past + Số giờ.
Ex: It’s ten past
eleven.(11.10)
+It’s + Số giờ +Số
phút.


Ex: It’s six forty
five.(6.45)


<b>Giờ kém:</b>


+It’s + Số phút +
To + Số giờ.


Ex: It’s twenty to
five.


_ The way of
asking when a
person does.


+What time


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>



<b>(5ms)</b>


_Gives some time and asks the students to practise
asking and answering.


+ 10.0 +9.20 +7.45


_Calls some students to read the time before the class.
_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A1,2


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
do as directed
_Read


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>


<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








<b>UNIT 4</b> <b>: AT SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic “At School” and help
them know how to ask and answer about the time their subjects happen.



<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the time
their subjects happen.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of time.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Math,English,Music,History,Physics,Physical Education,Change,Schedule,Subject.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _What +is/am/are +S +Ving?


_ S + is/am/are +Ving + Subjects.(môn học)
_What time do/does +S +V ?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to have a suitable schedule.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Chatting .


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 4:At School -Lesson 2 A: Schedules(3,4)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 4:At School -Lesson 1 A: Schedules(1,2)



<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>



<b>UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 2 :A_SCHEDULES (A3,4)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Pictures:</b>


_Shows the timetable and asks the students:
+ What is it?.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a new lesson about
the schedule.Before learning the new lesson I would like
to introduce you some new words”


_Listen and
answer the
question
_Listen and
guess the
lesson


<b>UNIT 4: AT</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON</b> <b>2</b>


<b>A_SCHEDULES</b>


<b>(A3,4)</b>


<b>Period 21</b>


I.New words:
+Math (n) Mơn
tốn


+English (n) Tiếng
Anh


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Math (n) [Translation/Example]
+English (n) [Translation/Example]
+Music (n) [Translation/Example]
+History (n) [Translation/Example]
+Physics (n) [Translation/Example]


+Physical Education (n) [Translation/Example]
+Change (n) [Translation]


+Schedule = Timetable [Realia]
+Subject (n) [Translation]



_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Matching”


_Reminds the students of the present continuous tense
+What +is/am/are +S +Ving?


+ S + is/am/are +Ving + Subjects.(môn học)


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering what time a person has a class.


+What time do/does +S +have + Subjects ?
+ S + has + Subjects + at + …..


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A3.Listen and write:</b>


_Explains the students the way of doing the exercise:
“This schedule lacks some information.They are either
names of subjects or times of the lessons.Now you listen
to it and write the needed information”


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) one time and do
the exercise.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape one more and do
the rest of the exercise.


_Calls some students to read before the class.



_Has the students listen to the last one and check their
answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


<b> Friday</b>


7.00 <b>7.50</b> 8.40 <b>9.40</b> 10.30


<b>English</b> Geography <b>Music</b> Physics <b>History</b>


<b>Saturday</b>


<b>1.00</b> 2.40 <b>3.40</b> 4.30


Physical Education <b>Math</b> English <b>Physics</b>


<b>A4.</b>


_Hangs the picture(page 43) on the board and ask the
students to say the names of subjects and the times in the
clocks.


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed


_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
focus on
teacher’word
s
_Listen and
do the
exercise
_Listen and
do the rest
_Read their
before the
class
_Listen and
check
_Correct
_Say the
names of
subjects and


+History (n) Lịch
Sử


+Physics (n) Vật


+Physical



Education (n) Thể
dục


+Change (n)Sự
thay đổi


+Schedule =


Timetable (n) Thời
khóa biểu


+Subject (n) Môn
học


II.Structures:
1.


+What +is/am/are
+S +Ving?


+ S + is/am/are
+Ving + Subjects.
(môn học)


2. The way of


asking and


answering what


time a person has a
class.


+What time


do/does +S +have
+ Subjects ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise asking
and answering as the example in the book.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to use their own timetable and
practise asking and answering what time a person have
their subjects.



_Calls some pairs roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A3,4


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


times
_Practise
_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen



<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








<b>UNIT 4 </b> <b>: AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 3 : A _ AT SCHOOL (A5)</b>
<b>Period : 22</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>



<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic “Schedules” and help
them know how to ask and answer about the time their subjects happen.


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the time
their subjects happen.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of time.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Favorite,Interesting,Important,Difficult,Fun


<b>b. Structures:</b> _When + do/does +S + have + Subjects? _S + have/has + Subjects ……
_ What time do/does + S +start?


_What + Tobe + One’s favorite Subjects? _One’s favorite subject +To Be……


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to have a suitable schedule.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Games.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 4:At School -Lesson 3 A: Schedules(5)



<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart,Cards


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 4:At School -Lesson 2 A: Schedules(3,4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>


<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b> <b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>


_Corrects their mistakes


<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>



<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 3 :A_SCHEDULES (A5)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>1 Network:</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Network”: _Play the


game


<b>UNIT 4: AT</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON</b> <b>3</b>


<b>A_SCHEDULES</b>
<b>(A5)</b>


<b>Period 22</b>


I.New words:
+ Favorite (a)
ưa thích



+ Interesting (a)
Thích thú


+ Important (a)
Quan troïng


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>


<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>2.Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a new lesson about
the schedule.Before learning the new lesson I would like
to introduce you some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ Favorite (a) [Example]
+ Interesting (a) [Translation]
+ Important (a) [Translation]
+ Difficult (a) [Translation]
+ Fun (a) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Cards”


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering what time a person has a class.


+What time(When) do/does +S +have + Subjects ?
+ S + has/have + Subjects ……


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering what subject a person likes.


+ What + Tobe + One’s favorite Subjects?
+ One’s favorite subject +To Be……


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A5.Listen and Read:</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) one time and
focus on their pronunciation and stress.


_Asks them to listen to the tape again while reading


along the tape.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to use their own timetable and
practise asking and answering what time they have their
subjects.


_Calls some pairs roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A5


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and


repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
copy down


_Listen and
focus on
_Listen and
read


_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Correct
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Listen and
do as directed


_Listen and
copy


+ Difficult (a)


Khó khăn


+ Fun (a)
Thú vị


II.Structures:
1.


+What time(When)
do/does +S +have
+ Subjects ?


+ S + has/have +
Subjects ……


2.


+ What + Tobe +
One’s favorite
Subjects?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

_Remarks the students’study. _Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>







<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>



<b> </b>



<b>UNIT 4 </b> <b>: AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 4 </b> <b>: A _SCHEDULES (A6)</b>


<b>Period </b> <b>: 23</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b>Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>


<b>+ </b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic “Schools In The USA”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>



+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about the difference between schools in the USA
and schools in Viet Nam.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b>


+ To make the students love their schools,teachers and friends.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary :</b> Different from,School uniform,Break,Cafeteria,Snacks,Popular,After-school activity.


<b>b. Structures :</b> + The simple present tense
+ Superlatives


+ S1 + Tobe + different from + 0.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills,especially reading


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing the importance of the school regulations and obey their regulations


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2.Techniques:</b> Questions and Answers,Example,Explanation,Realia,Translation,True-False,Group work, <b>3.</b>
<b>Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit4 : At School-Lesson 4: A-Shedules (A6)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Charts,Realia.



<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b>
<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of </b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.Presenta</b>


<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>



<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 4 : A_SHEDULES(A6) </b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Using pictures:</b>


<b>_</b>Shows the picture and ask the students some
questions:


+ What is it in the picture?
(It is a class)


+ Can you tell me where the class is? (In the USA or
Vietnam)


_Listen
and
answer
the
questions


<b>UNIT 4: </b>
<b>AT SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 4:</b>
<b>A_SHEDULES</b>
<b>(A6)</b>



<b>Period 23:</b>


I.New words:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


( It is in the USA)


<b>_</b>Introduces the content of the lesson :” Today,we are
going to learn about schools in the USA.Now, open
your books ,page 44”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>1.Teaches new words:</b>


+To be different from (Exp) [Example/Translation]
Ex: This book is different from that book.


+School uniform (n) [Realia]


(The teacher points one student wearing uniforms
and says” He/She is wearing uniform)


+Break (n) [Examle]


Ex: Every day,we learn one period and have a
5-minute break for the next period)



+Cafeteria (n) [Translation]
( Quán ăn tự phục vụ)
+Snacks (n) [Realia]


(The teacher gives a backage of snacks and say :This is
one kind of snacks)


+Popular # Unpopular (a) [Example/Translation]
Ex: Football is a popular sport in the world.
+After-school activity (n) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Cards”


(The teacher use some cards written in vietnamese
meanings of the words and the others written in
English)


_Introduces the students the way of using the structure:
“S1 + Tobe + different from + 0”


Ex: This book is different from that book.
S1 Tobe different from 0


<b>2.Prediction:</b>


_Asks the students to predict what the schools in the
USA are.


+ Uniform or not?



+ What time do classes start?
+ Are there breaks?


+ Is there a cafeteria or not?


+ What after-school activities do students often play?
_Calls some students to read their prediction.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A6.</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the tape (A6 on page
44),focus on their pronunciation and stress and check
their prediction.


_Has the students read the text individually


_Listen
and guess
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Listen
and copy


_Predict
_Read the
prediction
_Listen
focus,and
check
_Read

individua-lly


+School uniform (n)
Đồng phục học sinh
+Break (n) Giờ
giải lao


+Cafeteria (n)
Quán ăn tự phục vụ
+Snacks (n) Món
ăn nhẹ/Món ăn
nhanh


+Popular #


Unpopular (a)
Phổ biến
+After-school


activity (n) Hoạt
động sau giờ học
II.Answers:


A6:


a) T


b) F (There are no
lessons on Saturday)
c) F (One break is in
the morning,the
other is in the
afternoon.)


d) T


e) F (The school
cafeteria is open at
lunchtime and also
at break)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and find out the


statements in their books are True(Đúng) or False(Sai)
_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class and explain why they say so.(give their evidence
in the text)


_Provides the answers: (Hangs the chart with the
answers )


* Answers:
a) T


b) F (There are no lessons on Saturday)


c) F (One break is in the morning,the other is in the
afternoon.)


d) T


e) F (The school cafeteria is open at lunchtime and also
at break)


f) F (Basketball is one of the most popular after-school
activities.)


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Lets the students read the text again.


_Has the students work in groups of four and find out
the difference between schools in the USA and ones in


VietNam


_Calls some students to read their ideas before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes


_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson.
_Asks the students to:


+Repractice the text


+Learn by heart the new words.


+Prepare the new lesson Unit4 : At School_
Lesson 5 :B1,2.


_Remarks the students’study.


_Work in
pairs
_Read
their
answers
_Listen
and copy


_Read the
text
_Do as


directed
_Read
their
ideas
_Listen
and
correct
_Tell the
content
_Listen
and copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>




<b> </b>



<b> </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b> Date of preparation : </b>
<b> Date of teaching : </b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>


<b>+ </b>To introduce the students new words and structues relating to the topic “The Library”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about school subjects,schedules and
regulations and ask for and give directions.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their school.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Rack,Science book,Chemistry,Biology,Dictionary,Literature,Reference book,On the
right,On the left,At the back of


<b>b. Structures:</b> + The simple present tense


+ Where can I find + Names of books ?
+ Do you have + Names of books + here?


+ There are….


+ Preposition of Position


+ Demonstratives this/these;that/those


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills,especially reading


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their books and others in their school library.


<b>II. Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Using pictures,Realia,Games,Prediction,
Matching.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 4 : At School –Lesson 5 :B_ The Library(B1,2)


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 4: At School-Lesson 4 : A_ Schedules (A6)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?



<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(19ms)</b>


<b>B_THE LIBRARY (B1,2)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>



<b>* Game :“Wonderful Hat”</b>


<b>_ </b>Sticks a card with seven blanks on the board.


_ Says :” This word means a place where you can read
and borrow books.It begins the letter L”


<b>L</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b> <b>R</b> <b>A</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the lesson “Now,we are going to learn a
dialogue between students and the librarian.She is
showing the position of the books,newspapers and
magazines”


“Before learning new lesson.I would like to introduce
you some new words relating to the lesson.”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Rack (n) [Synonym]
(Rack = Shelf)


+Science book (n) [Example/Explanation]
+Chemistry (n) [Realia]


+Biology (n) [Realia]
+Dictionary (n) [Realia]
+Literature (n) [Realia]



+Reference book (n) [Example/Realia]
+On the right (Pre.) [Translation]
+On the left (Pre.) [Transaltion]
+At the back of (Pre.) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Matching”


_Asks the students to guess the content of the dialogue.
_Calls some students to say their guessing


<b>II. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue(B1 on page
47) and focus on their pronunciation and stress while
reading along the dialogue.


_Has the students work in pairs and read the dialogue
to find out the answers for the the questions in the
books.


_Calls some students read their answers before the
class.


_Provides the answers:
* Answers:


a) The magazines are on the racks(Near the science



_Play the
game
_Listen
and guess
the lesson
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Guess
_Say their
ideas
_Listen
and focus
_Read the
dialogue
and find
the
answers
_Read the
answers
_Listen
and
correct
<b>AT SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 5:</b>


<b>B_THE LIBRARY</b>
<b>Period 24:</b>
<b>B1.</b>
1.New words:
+Rack (n)


(Rack = Shelf)
Kệ,giá đỡ


+Science book (n)
Sách khoa học
+Chemistry (n)
Môn hóa học


+Biology (n) Môn
sinh học


+Dictionary (n)
Từ điển


+Literature (n)
Môn văn học


+Reference book
(n) Sách tham khảo
+On the right (Pre.)
Ở bên phải


+On the left (Pre.)
Ở bên trái



+At the back of
(Pre.) Ở phía sau
2.Answers:


a) The magazines
are on the
racks(Near the
science books)
b)The newspapers
are on the
racks(Near the
history books)


c) The math and
science books are on
the shelves on the
left.


d) The history and
geography


books,dictionaries
and literature in
Vietnamese are on
the shelves on the
right.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

books)



b)The newspapers are on the racks(Near the history
books)


c) The math and science books are on the shelves on
the left.


d) The history and geography books,dictionaries and
literature in Vietnamese are on the shelves on the
right.


e) The books in English are at the back of the library.
f) The library opens at 7 a.m.


g) The library closes at 4.30 p.m.


<b>B2.</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the new part :” You have listened to the
librarian introducing the positions of books and
newspapers in the library.Now,I would like all of you
to listen to a conversation between the librarian and
Nga about the way of asking for borrowing books and
answering for the questions”


_Has the students listen to the tape and focus on their
pronuciation and stress while reading along the tape.


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and practise the
dialogue.



_Calls some pairs to read the dialogue before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes.


_Introduces the students the structures of asking
answering where one book is and if the library has the
books a person needs.


<b> Where can I find + Names of books(Tên sách)</b>


<b>,please?</b>


Ex : Where can I find the math books,please?


<b> Do you have + Names of books + here ?</b>


Ex : Do you have English books?


<b> S + is/are + Cụm giới từ.</b>


Ex: They are on the shelves on the lelf/on the racks in
the middle.


_Lets the students see the picture again and identify
where some kinds of the books are.


_Calls some students to read the positions of the books.
_Asks the students to use the structures to practise
asking and answering about the library plan in B1.
_Calls some pairs to roleplay their dialogue.
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary.



_Listen
and guess


_Listen
and focus
_Practise
_Read
_Listen
and
correct
_Listen
and copy


_Look at
the
picture
_Do as
directed
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Listen
and


English are at the
back of the library.
f) The library opens
at 7 a.m.



g) The library closes
at 4.30 p.m.


<b>B2</b>


1. The structures of


asking and


answering where
one book is and if
the library has the
books a person
needs.


<b>Where can I find</b>


<b>+ Names of books</b>
<b>(Teân saùch) ,please?</b>


Ex : Where can I
find the math
books,please?


<b> Do you have +</b>


<b>Names of books +</b>
<b>here ?</b>


Ex : Do you have


English books?


<b> S + is/are + Cuïm</b>


<b>giới từ.</b>


Ex: They are on the
shelves on the
lelf/on the racks in
the middle.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks one student to tell names of the books in the
library and the structures used to ask and answer about
the positions of the books.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractice the dialogues.
+Learn by heart the new words.


+Prepare the new lesson Unit4: At School- B3,4.
_Remarks the students’study.



correct
_One tells
as


directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>




<b> </b>



<b>UNIT 4 </b> <b>: AT SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 25</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content: </b>


<b>+ </b>To introduce the students more new words and structues relating to the topic “The Library”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b>


+ By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about the United states’Library of congress.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their school.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Put,Keep on,Go on,Library of congress,Capital,Receive,Copy,Contain,Employee.


<b>b. Structures:</b> + The simple present tense
+ How many + Nouns ….. ?
+ Why……..?


+ Where is/am/are + S ?


+ Preposition of Position


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills,especially reading


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their books and others in their school library.


<b>II. Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Pairwork,Using pictures,Realia,Games,Prediction,
Matching.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 4 : At School –Lesson 5 :B_ The Library(B3,4)


<b>4. Matearials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 4: At School-Lesson 4 : B_ The library (B1,2)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>



<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms)</b>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.Presenta</b>
<b>-tion of</b>
<b>the new</b>
<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 4 :AT SCHOOL</b>
<b>B_THE LIBRARY (B3,4)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Game :“Network”</b>


_Play the
game


<b>UNIT 4: </b>


<b>AT SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 6:</b>
<b>B_THE</b>


<b>LIBRARY(B3,4)</b>
<b>Period 25:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the lesson “Now,we are going to learn a
listening about the position of racks in the library”
“Before learning new lesson.I would like to introduce
you some new words relating to the lesson.”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To Put (v) [Mime]
+Keep on (v) [Translation]
+Go on (v) [Translation]


+Library of congress (n) [Translation]
+Capital (n) [Example]


+To Receive (v) [Translation/Example]
+Copy (n) [Realia]


+To Contain (v) [Translation]



+Employee (n) [Translation/Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Matching”


_Asks the students to look at the picture in B3 and
guess the position of the racks and shelves of books in
the library..


_Calls some students to say their guessing


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B3</b>


<b>_</b>Gives the instructions to the students.


_Asks the students to listen to the dialogue(B3 on page
48) and check their guessing.


_Has the students listen to the dialogue and do the
exercise.


_Asks the students to listen to again and do the rest
_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Provides the answers:
* Answers:



1.Study area
2.Science + Math
3.Geography


4.+5.Newspapers and Magazines
6+7.English


8.Librarian’s desk


<b>B4.</b>


_Shows the picture in the book on page 49 and ask the
students:
_Listen
and guess
the lesson
_Listen
and
repeat
_Copy
down
_Listen
and do as
directed
_Guess
_Say their
ideas
_Listen
_Listen
and check


_Listen
_Do the
rest
_Read
their
answers
_Listen
and
correct
_Listen
and
tục,duy trì


+Go on (v) Tiếp
tục


+Library of congress
(n) Thư viện quốc
hội


+Capital (n) Thủ
đô


+To Receive (v)
Nhaän


+Copy (n) Bản sao
+To Contain (v)
Chứa đựng



+Employee (n)
Nhân công


II.Answers:
B3


1.Study area
2.Science + Math
3.Geography
4.+5.Newspapers
and Magazines
6+7.English
8.Librarian’s desk
B4


a) It is in
Washington D.C,the
capital of the U.S.A.
b) It has over 100
million books.


c) It has 1,000 km
shelves.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>


<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


+Which building is it in the picture?


<b>_</b>Introduces the new part :” You will read about the
largest library in the world.You read it silently and
answer the questions in your book.”


_Has the students read the text in silence.


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and answer the
questions.


_Asks the students to compare their answers.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes.
* Answers:


a) It is in Washington D.C,the capital of the U.S.A.
b) It has over 100 million books.


c) It has 1,000 km shelves.


d) Over 5,000 people work there.



e) Because it receives copies of all American books.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students some questions:


+Which is the largest library in Binh Dinh?
+Where is it?


_Asks one student to tell the content of the lesson
_Asks the students to:


+Repractice B3,4


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit5
_Remarks the students’study.


answer
_Listen
and guess
_Read
_work in
pairs
_Compare
_Read
_Correct


_Listen


and
answers
_One tells
as


directed
_Listen
and copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b>---UNIT 5 </b> <b>: WORK AND PLAY</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>Date of preparation :</b>
<b>Date of teaching :</b>
<b>Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words relating to the topic “Work and Play”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to describe the work of a student at
school and use the simple present tense to express repeated actions as well as subjects.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of studying.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Learn,Study,Map,Computer,Computer Science Class,To be interested in,Last,Experiment.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing what his/her favorite subject is.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Translation,Rub Out And Remember.



<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 1 A: In Class(A1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 4:At School -Lesson 6 -B: The Library(B3,4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>



<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>
<b>LESSON 1 :A_IN CLASS (A1)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:


+ How many days a week do you go to school?
+ What time do you go to school?


+ What time do classes begin?
+ How many subjects do you study?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about Mai and
you can answer the questions exactly.Before learning the
new lesson I would like to introduce you some new


_Listen and
answer the
questions



_Listen and
guess the
lesson


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 1 A_IN</b>
<b>CLASS(A1)</b>


<b>Period 26</b>


I.New words:
+ To Learn = To
Study (v) Học
+ Map (n) Bản đồ
+ Computer (n)
Máy tính


+Computer


Science Class (n)
Giờ tin học


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>



<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ To Learn = To Study (v) [Synonym]
+ Map (n) [Picture]


+ Computer (n) [Picture]


+ Computer Science Class (n) [Picture]
+ To be interested in = To Like [Synonym]
+ Last (a) [Translation]


+ Experiment (n) [Picture]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


_Reminds the students of the simple present tense


+ Form: <b>S+ Vs(es)</b>


+ Use: Used to express a repeated action.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1.Listen and Read:</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one student to read the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in groups and make five
questions about Mai based on the text.


_Calls some students to read the questions before the
class.


_Calls five students to go to the board and write the
quesitons


_Gives feedback.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs ask and answer about
themselves.


_Calls some pairs roleplay before the class.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A1


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy down


_Listen and
focus
_One reads
the text
_Corrects
_Work in
groups
_Read
_Write the


questions
_Correct
_Practise
_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


in = To Like
Thích,quan tâm
+ Last (a) Cuối
cùng


+ Experiment (n)
Thí nghiệm


II.Structures:


1.The simple


present tense:
+<b>Form:</b>
<b>S+ Vs(es)</b>


+<b>Use:</b> Used to


express a repeated
action.


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>Period </b> <b>: 27</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>:7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>



<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words relating to the topic “Work and Play”


<b>_ Language funtion:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to describe the work of a student at
school and use the simple present tense to express repeated actions as well as subjects.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of studying.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Enjoy,Electronics,Repair,Fix,Household,appliance,Light,To be good at,Guitar,Art Club,
Drawing,Famous,Artist.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _The simple present tense.
_ The simple future tense


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing what his/her favorite subject is.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Explanation,Using Pictures,Translation,Matching.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 2 A: In Class(A2)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.



<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 1 A: In Class(A1)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>



<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>
<b>LESSON 2 :A_IN CLASS (A2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:
+ How many subjects do you study?
+ What is your favorite subject?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about Ba
.Before learning the new lesson I would like to introduce


_Listen and
answer the
questions
_Listen and
guess the
lesson


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 2 A_IN</b>
<b>CLASS(A2)</b>



<b>Period 27</b>


I.New words:
+To Enjoy = To
Like :Thích


+ Electronics (n)
Điện tử học


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


you some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To Enjoy = To Like [Synonym]
+ Electronics (n) [Picture]


+ To Repair= To Fix (v) [Synonym]
+ Household (n) [Translation]
+ Appliance (n) [Translation]
+ Light (n) [Realia]


+ To be good at + Ving : [Translation]


Ex: He is good at fixing things


+ Guitar (n) [Picture]


+ Art Club (n) [Translation]
+ Drawing (n) [Translation]
+ Famous (a) [Translation]
+ Artist (n) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Matching”


_Reminds the students of the simple present tense
+ Form: <b>S+ Vs(es)</b>


+ Use: Used to express a repeated action.
_Reminds the students of the simple future tense
+ Form: <b>S+ Will/Can + V bare infinitive.</b>


+ Use: Used to express an action happening in future.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A2.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A2) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one student to read the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.



_Asks the students to work in groups and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write the
answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


a) Ba likes electronics best.


b) Yes, he does.He enjoys the school very much.
c) He learns to repairs household appliances.
d) He will be able to his own appliances.
e) Yes, he is.His drawings are very good.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs ask and answer about
themselves.


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed


_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
focus
_One reads
the text
_Corrects
_Work in
groups
_Read
_Write the
answers
_Correct
_Practise
chữa


+ Household (n)
Hộ gia đình


+ Appliance (n)
Thiết bị


+ Light (n)
Bóng đèn


+ To be good at +
Ving : Giởi ở
điều gì



Ex: He is good at
fixing things


+ Guitar (n) Đàn
ghi-ta


+ Art Club (n)
Câu lạc bộ họa só
+ Drawing (n)
Tranh veõ


+ Famous (a)
Nổi tiếng
II.Structures:
1.The simple
present tense:
+<b>Form:</b>
<b>S+ Vs(es)</b>


+<b>Use:</b> Used to
express a repeated
action.


2. The simple
future tense


+ <b>Form</b>:


<b>S+ Will/Can + V</b>


<b>bare infinitive.</b>


+<b>Use:</b> Used to
express an action


happening in


future.
III.Answers:


a) Ba likes
electronics best.
b) Yes, he does.He
enjoys the school
very much.


c) He learns to
repairs household
appliances.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Calls some pairs roleplay before the class.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A2


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


appliances.


e) Yes, he is.His
drawings are very
good.


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>







<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b>UNIT 5 </b> <b>: WORK AND PLAY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures to solve the English math
question simply.


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to solve the English math question
and do listening exercises.(Listen and match the correct pictures)



_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of studying.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Cost,Banana,Price,Problem,Erase,Pleasure,Correct.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _The present progressive tense.
_ The simple present tense.
_ How much does + S + cost?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to solve an English math question.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Using Pictures,Translation,
Rub Out And Remember,Mime.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 3 A: In Class(A3,4)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 2 A: In Class(A2)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>



<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>



<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>
<b>LESSON 3 :A_IN CLASS (A3,4)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:
+ Do you like math?


+ Is it difficult or easy?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue in which


_Listen and
answer the
questions
_Listen and
guess the


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 3 A_IN</b>
<b>CLASS(A3,4)</b>
<b>Period 28</b>


I.New words:
+ To Cost (v) C ó
giá



+Banana (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


they are solving a math problem.You read and answer
“How much does one banana cost?” .Before learning the
new lesson I would like to introduce you some new
words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ To Cost (v) [Translation]
+Banana (n) [Picture]
+Price (n) [Example]
+Problem (n) [Translation]
+To Erase (n) [Mime]
+Pleasure (n) [Translation]
+Correct (a) [Translation/Mime]
+Technology (n) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering about the price of a thing or things.



How much does/do +S + cost? _S + Cost(s) + Price.
How much is it? _ It is + Price.


How much are they? _They are + Price.


Ex: How much is the book?


(How much does the book cost?)
It is 7,000 dong.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A3.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A3) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one pair to roleplay the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in groups and answer the
question in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write the
answer.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:



+ One banana costs 600 dong.


<b>A4.</b>


_Asks the students to look at the pictures in the book on
page 54 and asks them some questions:


+ What are the puictures about?
+ What school subjects do you like?


+ Can you guess what subjects Ba and Hoa do on
Saturday morning?


_Asks the students to listen to the tape one time and


lesson


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy down
_Listen and
focus
_Roleplay
_Corrects


_Work in
groups
_Read their
before the
class
_Write the
answers
_Correct


_Look at the
pictures and
answers the
questions
_Listen and


+Problem (n)
Vấn đề


+To Erase (n)
Xóa


+Pleasure (n)
Hài lòng,Vui


+Correct (a)


Đúng


+Technology (n)
Kỉ thuật



II.Structures:
_ The way of


asking and


answering about
the price of a thing
or things.


How much


does/do +S + cost?
_S + Cost(s) +
Price.


How much is it? _


It is + Price.


How much are


they? _They are +
Price.


Ex: How much is
the book?


(How much
does the book


cost?)


It is 7,000
dong.


III.Answers:
A4.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


write the subjects they have heard.


_Asks the students to match the pictures with the subjects
they have heard.


_Has them compare their answers.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Plays the tape one more and asks the stuents to check


their answers.


_Gives feedback
*Answers:
+ Ba: d,a,e
+ Hoa: c,b,e


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs ask and answer about
periods in the tape.


_Calls some pairs roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A3,4


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


write
_Match
_Compare
_Read
_Listen and


check
_Correct


_Practise
_Roleplay
_Listen and
correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








<b>UNIT 5 </b> <b>: WORK AND PLAY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” In
Class”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about the subjects and what
they learn about them.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of studying.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Essay,Event,People,Author,Preposition,Temperature,Graph,Equation,
Calculator,Globe,Atlas,Paint


<b>b. Structures: </b>_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>



_Knowing how to learn all the subjects they have studied at school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Using Pictures,Translation,Matching
Rub Out And Remember,Mime.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 4 A: In Class(A5,6)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 3 A: In Class(A3,4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>



<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>
<b>LESSON 4 :A_IN CLASS (A5,6)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:


+ How many subjects do you study at school?
+ What do you study in each subject?


+ Which subject do you like/dislike? Why?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>



<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about the


_Listen and
answer the
questions
_Listen and
guess the


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 4 A_IN</b>
<b>CLASS(A5,6)</b>
<b>Period 29</b>


I.New words:
+Essay (n) Bài
văn


+Event (n) Sự
kiện


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


content of subjects which vietnamese students
study.Before learning the new lesson I would like to
introduce you some new words”



<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Essay (n) [Translation]
+Event (n) [Translation]
+People (n) [Translation]
+Author (n) [Example]
+Preposition (n) [Example]
+Temperature (n) [Translation]
+Graph (n) [Drawing]


+Equation (n) [Example]
+Calculator (n) [Realia]
+Globe (n) [Realia]
+Atlas (n) [Realia]
+Paint (n) [Realia]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A5.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A5) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one student to read the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in groups and do the


exercise”Now discuss with a partner.Odd one out”


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write the
answer.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


+ Literature _ Paintings
+ History _ basketball games
+ Science _ Preposition
+ English _ England


<b>A6.</b>


_Asks the students some questions:


+ What do you need/use in Art/Math…class?


_Asks the students to work in groups and do the exrcise
A6


_Has them compare their answers.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.



_Gives feedback
*Answers:


+ Physical education _ games,running shoes,ball


lesson


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
focus
_Read
_Corrects
_Work in
groups
_Read
_Write the
answers
_Correct
_Listen and
answers
_Match
_Compare
_Read
_Correct



+Author (n) Tác
giả


+Preposition (n)
Giới từ


+Temperature (n)
Nhiệt độ


+Graph (n) đồ
thị,biểu đồ


+Equation (n)
Cơng thức


+Calculator (n)
Máy tính


+Globe (n) Qủa địa
cầu


+Atlas (n)úách
bản đồ


+Paint (n) Sôn
II.Answers:
A5.


+ Literature _
Paintings



+ History _
basketball games
+ Science _
Preposition


+ English _
England
A6
+ Physical
education _
games,running
shoes,ball


+ Geography _
map,globe,atlas
+ Music _
pianop,guitar,song
books


+ Art _


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>



<b>(5ms)</b>


+ Geography _ map,globe,atlas
+ Music _ pianop,guitar,songbooks
+ Art _ paint,pecils,paper


+ Math _ graphs,equations,calculator.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to translate the text into vietnamese.
_Calls some students to read their translation before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A5,6


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Practise
_Read
_Listen and


correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b>UNIT 5 </b> <b>: WORK AND PLAY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b> Date of preparation :</b>


<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” It’s time for
recess”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about activities at recess
and listen and say the activies at recess correctly.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Bell,Ring,Recess,Chat,Blind’s man bluff,Catch,Play marbles,Skip rope,Go indoors.


<b>b. Structures: </b>_ The present continuous tense.
_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after hard classes.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Using Pictures,Matching,
Rub Out And Remember,Mime



<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 5 :B_It’s Time For Recess.


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 3 A: In Class(A3,4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 5 :B_IT’S TIME FOR RECESS(B1,2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Hangs the pictures on the board and asks the students :
+ What are they doing?


_Gives some phrases and asks the students to match the
correct phrases with the pictures.


* Answers:


_Listen and
answer the
question
_Match


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>



<b>LESSON</b> <b>5:</b>


<b>B_IT’S TIME</b>
<b>FOR RECESS</b>
<b>(B1,2)</b>


<b>Period 30</b>


I.New words:
+Bell (n) Cái
chuông


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


+ a) Talking and skipping rope.
+ b) Eating and drinking.
+ c) Playing marbles.


+ d) Playing blind’s man bluff.
+ e) Playing catch.


+ f) Reading


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about the
activities students in Vietnam often play at recess.Before


learning the new lesson I would like to introduce you
some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Bell (n) [Picture]
+To Ring (v) [Mime]
+Recess (n) [Example]
+To Chat (v) [Mime]


+Blind’s man bluff (n) [Picture]
+Catch (n) [Picture]


+To Play marbles (v) [Picture]
+To Skip rope (v) [Picture]
+To Go indoors (v) {Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


_Reviews the students the present continuous tense by
asking the students to find out the sentences with the
present continuous tense.


+<b>Form</b>: S + is/am/are + Ving


+<b>Use</b>: Used to express an action happening at speaking.
Ex: Some students are playing games.



<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(B1) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one student to read the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about the activities in the pictures.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Corrects the students’mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about themselves.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes.


_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat


_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
focus
_Read
_Corrects
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
before the
class
_Write their
sentences
_Correct
_Do as
directed
_Roleplay
_Correct


+Recess (n) Giờ ra
chơi


+To Chat (v) Tán
gẫu


+Blind’s man bluff
(n) Trò chơi bịt


mắt bắt dê.


+Catch (n) Trò
chơi trốn tìm


+To Play marbles
(v) Chơi bắn bi
+To Skip rope (v)
Chơi nhảy dây
+To Go indoors (v)
Vào lớp


II.Structures:


<b>1.The present</b>
<b>continuous tense</b>


+<b>Form</b>: S +


is/am/are + Ving
+<b>Use</b>: Used to
express an action


happening at


speaking.


Ex: Some students
are playing games
III.Answers:


B2.


+ Mai_ Playing
catch.


+ Kien _Playing
blindman’s bluff.
+ Lan_Skipping
rope.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>B2.</b>


_Introduces the new part:”You will hear the tape about
Mai,Kien,Lan,Ba.They are at the recess.Now you liaten
to the tape and decide which games each student plays
by matching the names on the left column with the
activities on the right one”


_Asks the students to guess the games each student plays


in the tape.


_Calls some students to read their guessing.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape do the exercise
B2.


_Has them listen to the tape once more and do the rest.
_Has them compare their answers.


_Calls some students to read then write their answers on
the board.


_Gives feedback
*Answers:


+ Mai_ Playing catch.


+ Kien _Playing blindman’s bluff.
+ Lan_Skipping rope.


+ Ba_Playing marbles.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks some students to mime some activities and ask the
others to read the sentences,using the present continuous
tense.


_Calls some students to read their sentences before the


class.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B1,2


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen


_Guessing
_Read
_Listen and
do


_Do the rest
_Compare
_Read
_Correct


_Do as
directed
_Read
_Listen and


correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>











<b>UNIT 5 </b> <b>: WORK AND PLAY</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” It’s
time for recess”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about activities at recess of
the students in The USA


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Pen Pal,Junior High School,Take part in,Energetic,Score,Portable,Earphone,Swap.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after hard classes.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach



<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Using Pictures,Matching,
Rub Out And Remember,Mime


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 5 :B_It’s Time For Recess (B3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play -Lesson 5 :B- It’s Time For Recess(B1,2)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>



<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON 5 :B_IT’S TIME FOR RECESS(B1,2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>_</b>Hangs the pictures on the board and asks the students :
+ What are they doing?


_Gives some phrases and asks the students to match the
correct phrases with the pictures.


* Answers:


+ a) Talking and skipping rope.


_Listen and
answer the
question


_Match


<b>UNIT 5: WORK</b>
<b>AND PLAY</b>


<b>LESSON</b> <b>5:</b>


<b>B_IT’S TIME</b>
<b>FOR RECESS</b>
<b>(B1,2)</b>


<b>Period 30</b>


I.New words:
+Bell (n) Cái
chuông


+To Ring (v)
Rung,reo


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


+ b) Eating and drinking.
+ c) Playing marbles.


+ d) Playing blind’s man bluff.
+ e) Playing catch.



+ f) Reading


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about the
activities students in Vietnam often play at recess.Before
learning the new lesson I would like to introduce you
some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Bell (n) [Picture]
+To Ring (v) [Mime]
+Recess (n) [Example]
+To Chat (v) [Mime]


+Blind’s man bluff (n) [Picture]
+Catch (n) [Picture]


+To Play marbles (v) [Picture]
+To Skip rope (v) [Picture]
+To Go indoors (v) {Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


_Reviews the students the present continuous tense by
asking the students to find out the sentences with the
present continuous tense.



+<b>Form</b>: S + is/am/are + Ving


+<b>Use</b>: Used to express an action happening at speaking.
Ex: Some students are playing games.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(B1) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks one student to read the text before the class.
_Corrects the student’s mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about the activities in the pictures.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Corrects the students’mistakes if necessary.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about themselves.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects their mistakes.



<b>B2.</b>


_Introduces the new part:”You will hear the tape about


_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
focus
_Read
_Corrects
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Write their
sentences
_Correct
_Do as
directed
_Roleplay
_Correct
_Listen


chơi


+To Chat (v) Tán
gẫu


+Blind’s man bluff
(n) Trò chơi bịt
mắt bắt dê.


+Catch (n) Trò
chơi trốn tìm


+To Play marbles
(v) Chơi bắn bi
+To Skip rope (v)
Chơi nhảy dây
+To Go indoors (v)
Vào lớp


II.Structures:


<b>1.The present</b>
<b>continuous tense</b>


+<b>Form</b>: S +


is/am/are + Ving
+<b>Use</b>: Used to
express an action



happening at


speaking.


Ex: Some students
are playing games
III.Answers:
B2.


+ Mai_ Playing
catch.


+ Kien _Playing
blindman’s bluff.
+ Lan_Skipping
rope.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


Mai,Kien,Lan,Ba.They are at the recess.Now you liaten
to the tape and decide which games each student plays


by matching the names on the left column with the
activities on the right one”


_Asks the students to guess the games each student plays
in the tape.


_Calls some students to read their guessing.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape do the exercise
_Has them listen to the tape once more and do the rest.
_Has them compare their answers.


_Calls some students to read then write their answers on
the board.


_Gives feedback
*Answers:


+ Mai_ Playing catch.


+ Kien _Playing blindman’s bluff.
+ Lan_Skipping rope.


+ Ba_Playing marbles.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks some students to mime some activities and ask the
others to read the sentences,using the present continuous
tense.



_Calls some students to read their sentences before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes if necessary


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson before
the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B1,2


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Guess
_Read
_Listen and
do


_Do the rest
_Compare
_Read
_Correct


_Do as
directed
_Read
_Listen and


correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>









<b>UNIT 6 </b> <b>: AFTER SCHOOL</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” After
School”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about activities after school.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Should,Relax,Invite


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ S+ Should + V bare infinitive.
_Why don’t you…….?


_Let’s +V bare infinitive.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach



<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Using Pictures,Jumble Words,Game.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 1 :A_What do you do?(A1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 5: Work And Play - Lesson 6 :B_It’s Time For Recess (B3)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>


<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 1 :A_WHAT DO YOU DO?(A1)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Network”</b>


_Asks the students to list the activities at recess of the
students in VN and in the USA.


_Play the
game


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 1:</b>


<b>A_WHAT DO</b>


<b>YOU DO?(A1)</b>
<b>Period 32</b>


I.New words:
+ Should (v) Nên
+To Relax (v)
Giải lao,Thư giãn
+To Invite (v) Mời
II.Structures:
Activities


at recess
in VN


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue about the
activities which Hoa and Minh often play after
school.Before learning the new lesson I would like to
introduce you some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>



+ Should (v) [Translation]
+To Relax (v) [Example]


+To Invite (v) [Translation/Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Jumble Words”


_Introduces the students some ways of sugesstion.


S+ Should + V bare infinitive.


Ex: We should relax.


Why don’t you…….?


Ex: Why don’t you come along?


Let’s +V bare infinitive.


Ex: Let’s go.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) and focus on the
pronuciation and stress.


_Asks two students to roleplay the dialogue before the
class.



_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in groups of 4 and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Gives feedback
*Answers:


a) She is doing her Math homework.
b) They are going to get a cold drink.
c) He’s in the music room.


d) He’s learning to play the guitar.
e) He usually meets his friends.
f) She likes playing volleyball.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “Noughts And Crosses”</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Noughts And
Crosses”,Using the present continuous tense.



Do home work Watch T.V Listen to Music


_Listen and
guess the
lesson


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen and
focus
_Roleplay
_Corrects
_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Write their
sentences
_Correct


_Do as
directed


_ Some ways of


sugesstion.


S+ Should + V


bare infinitive.
Ex: We should
relax.


Why don’t


you…….?


Ex: Why don’t you
come along?


Let’s +V bare


infinitive.
Ex: Let’s go.
III.Answers:
A1


a) She is doing her
Math homework.
b) They are going
to get a cold drink.
c) He’s in the
music room.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>II.Consoli</b>


<b>dation:</b>


<b>(43ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


Play Soccer Go swimming Go to the movie


Skip rope Play marbles Play catch


_Asks the students the question:


+ What do you usually do after school?
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise A1


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen



<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 6 </b> <b>: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” After
School”



<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about activities after school
and use some adverbs of frequecy to express the activities.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The Present continuous tense.
_The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Using Pictures,Matching,Game,Mime


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 2 :A_What do you do?(A2)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 6: After School -Lesson 1 :A_What do you do?(A1)



<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 2 :A_WHAT DO YOU DO?(A2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Guessing”</b>


_Asks some students to describe their activities by
writing in a small paper and then read aloud. The others
listen and guess what the activities are.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn to use adverbs of
frequency to express the activities after school.”


_Play the
game


_Listen and
guess the


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 2:</b>



<b>A_WHAT DO</b>
<b>YOU DO?(A2)</b>
<b>Period 33</b>


I.Adverb of


frequency:


+ Always :Luoân
luoân


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_Review the students some adverbs of frequency:</b>


+ Always :Luôn luôn
+ Often: Thường


+Usually:Thường Thường
+Sometimes:Thỉnh thoảng
+Never:Không bao giờ


_Reminds the students of the positions of adverbs in
sentences.



+ Trước động từ thường
Ex: I often go fishing.
+Sau trợ động từ và TOBE
Ex: I am often late for school.
Ex: I don’t often go to school.


_Asks the students to look at the pictures in their book
and guess what they are doing in the pictures.


_Calls some students to present their ideas.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A2.</b>


<b>a)</b>


<b>_</b>Gives some phrases and hangs the pictues.


_Has the students work in groups and then match the
pictures with the correct phrases.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.
b)


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practise ask and
answer as the following example:



Ex:


+ What do you usually do after school?
+I usually go fishing.


_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “Noughts And Crosses”</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Noughts And
Crosses”,Using the above adverbs and the simple
present tense.


<i><b>Always</b></i>


Do home work <i><b>Often</b></i>Watch T.V <i><b>Never</b></i>Listen to Music


lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and


copy


_Do a s
directed
_Present their
ideas


_Look at the
picture and
phrases
_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Correct
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Write their
sentences
_Correct
_Listen and
do as directed


+Sometimes:Thỉnh
thoảng


+Never:Không bao
giờ



II.The positions of
the adverbs:


+ Trước động từ
thường


Ex: I often go
fishing.


+Sau trợ động từ
và TOBE


Ex: I am often late
for school.


Ex: I don’t often go
to school.


III.Answers:
A2


a)


1)Reading/


Studying in library
2)Swimming in the
pool


3)Playing



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<i><b>Sometimes</b></i>


Play Soccer <i><b>Usually</b></i>Go swimming <i><b>Always</b></i>Go to the movie


<i><b>Sometimes</b></i>


Skip rope <i><b>Never</b></i>Play marbles <i><b>Often</b></i>Play catch
_Asks the students the question:


+ What do you usually do after school?
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise A2


+Learn by heart the adverbs
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
answer


_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 6 </b> <b>: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” After
School”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about activities after school
and listen and match the correct pictures with the phrases.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Pastime,Theater,Rehearse,Anniversary Celebration,Stamp collector,Sporty.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The Present continuous tense.
_The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 3 :A_What do you do?(A3,4)



<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 6: After School -Lesson 2 :A_What do you do?(A2)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>



<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 3 :A_WHAT DO YOU DO?(A3,4)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Guides the way to play:


“One person tells the name of a person in class and the
others guess what activities he/she often do after school.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about
activities Nga,Ba and Nam often do after.Before the new


_Play the
game


_Listen and
guess the



<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 3:</b>


<b>A_WHAT DO</b>
<b>YOU DO?(A3,4)</b>
<b>Period 34</b>


I.New words:
+Pastime (n) Trò
tiêu khiển


+Theater (n)


Rạp hát


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


lesson I would like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Pastime (n) [Translation]
+Theater (n) [Example]
+To Rehearse (v) [Translation]



+Anniversary Celebration (n) [Translation]
+Stamp collector (n) [Example]


+Sporty ( a) [Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”


_Asks the students to guess what activities Nga,Ba and
Nam often do after school.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A3.</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (A3) and focus on the
pronunciation and stress.


_Calls one student to read the text again.


_Asks the students to read the text and check their
guessing.


_Has the students work in groups and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the


class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Has some students to go to the board and write the
answers.


*Answers:


a)Her theater group is rehearsing a play for the school
anniversary celebration.


b)He gets American stamps from Liz,his American
friend.


c)The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday
afternoon.


d) Nam never plays games.


<b>A4.</b>


<b>_Introduces the listening task:</b>


“We are going to listen to a group of students talking
about their after-school activities.You listen and do
exercise in part 4(page 63)”


_Asks the students to listen to the tape and match.



_Asks the students to listen to the tape once more and do
the rest they can’t finish in the first time.


lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
focus
_One reads
the text
_Read and
check
_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Correct
_Write the
answers
_Listen
_Listen and
do the
exercise


_Do the rest


+Anniversary
Celebration (n) Lễ
kỉ niệm


+Stamp collector
(n) Sưu tầm tem
+Sporty ( a)
Thích thể thao
III.Answers:
A3


a)Her theater
group is rehearsing
a play for the
school anniversary
celebration.


b)He gets


American stamps


from Liz,his


American friend.


c)The stamp


collector’s club



meets on


Wednesday
afternoon.


d) Nam never
plays games.
A4.


a) Mai_go to
school cafeteria
b) Nam_Rehearse
a play


c) Ba_go to the
circus


d) Lan_ Watch
movie


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>



<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks the students to compare their answers.
_Calls some students to read their answers


_Has the students listen to the tape and check their
answers


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.
*Answers:


a) Mai_go to school cafeteria
b) Nam_Rehearse a play
c) Ba_go to the circus
d) Lan_ Watch movie
e) Kien_tidy the classroom


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_Asks the students to work in groups and fill in the</b>
information.


<b>Nga</b> <b>Ba</b> <b>Nam</b> <b>You</b>


<b>Favorite </b>


<b>Pastime</b>
<b>---Activities</b> <sub> </sub>
<b>---Places</b> <sub> </sub>



---_Calls some students to read their table.
_Corrects the mistakes.


<b>* Play the game “Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering as the following model:


A:Who likes + Ving
B: (Give out the name)
_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A3,4


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Compare
_Read their
answers
_Check
_Correct


_Work in
groups


_Read their
table


_Correct


_Work in
pairs


_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b>Period : 35</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” Let’s Go”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to give suggestions and an
invitation as well as accept or refuse them.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Assignment


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ What about +Ving.. ?
_ How about + Ving… ?


_ Why don’t you +Vbare infinitive…?
_ Let’s + V bare infinitive..


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,



<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 4 :B_Let’s Go (B1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 6: After School -Lesson 3 :A_What do you do?(A3,4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>


<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 4 :B_LET’S GO (B1)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Network”</b>


_Divides the students into two teams and play the game. _Play the
game


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 4:</b>


<b>B_LET’S GO (B1)</b>
<b>Period 35</b>


I.New words:
+ Assignment (n)
Bài tập



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


What about----? How about---?
Why don’t you----?
Let’s---




We should---


<b>Let’s---_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue about
activities which Lan,Ba,Hoa and Nam often relax.Before
the new lesson I would like to introduce some new
words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+ Assignment (n) [Synonym]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Jumble words”


_Introduces the students some ways of giving
suggestions and an invitation.



+ What about +Ving.. ?
+How about + Ving… ?


+Why don’t you +Vbare infinitive…?
+Let’s + V bare infinitive..


_Asks the students to guess what activities Lan,Ba,Hoa
and Nam often relax.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (B1) and focus on the
pronunciation and stress.


_Calls one student to read the text again.


_Asks the students to read the text and check their
guessing.


_Has the students work in groups and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.



_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Has some students to go to the board and write the


_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy
_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
focus
_One reads
the text
_Read and
check
_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Correct
_Write the



and an invitation.
+ What about
+Ving.. ?


Ex: What about


going to the


movies?


+How about +
Ving… ?


Ex:How about


going to the


movies?


+Why don’t you
+Vbare


infinitive…?


Ex: Why don’t you
go to the movies?
+Let’s + V bare
infinitive..


Ex: Let’s go to the


movies?


III.Answers:
B1


a)Nam wants to go
to the movies.
b)Lan doesn’t want
to go to the movies
because there
aren’t any good
movies at the
moment.


c)Lan wants to
listen to some
music at her house.
d) Hoa doesn’t
want to go to Lan’s
house because she
has so many
assignments.


e)It’s Saturday.
<b>Activities to </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>



<b>(4ms)</b>


<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


answers.
*Answers:


a)Nam wants to go to the movies.


b)Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies because there
aren’t any good movies at the moment.


c)Lan wants to listen to some music at her house.


d) Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house because she
has so many assignments.


e)It’s Saturday.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in groups and make the
sentences according to the faces  (agree) and 


(disagree):
1)



A: Let’s/listen/music// B: 


2)


A: What/go/cafeteria// B : 


3)


A: Why/study/library// B : 


_Calls some students to read their sentences


_Asks some students to go to the board and write their
sentences.


_Corrects the mistakes.


<b>* Play the game “Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering as the following model:


A:Who likes + Ving
B: (Give out the name)
_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B1


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


answers


_Work in
groups


_Read their
sentences
_Write their
sentences
_Correct
_Work in
pairs


_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>







<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b>---UNIT 6 </b> <b>: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<b>Date of preparation :</b>
<b>Date of teaching :</b>
<b>Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” Let’s
Go”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk the top ten most popular
activities of the American teenagers in their free time.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Teenager,Survey,Youth Organization,Scout,Musical Instrument.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills



<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax in their free time.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 5 :B_Let’s Go (B2)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 6: After School -Lesson 4 :B_Let’s Go (B1)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 5 :B_LET’S GO (B2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Network”</b>


_Divides the students into two teams and play the game. _Play the
game


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>



<b>LESSON 5:</b>
<b>B_LET’S GO</b>
<b>(B2)</b>


<b>Period 36</b>


I.New words:
+Teenager (n)
Thanh thieáu niên
+Survey (n)
Khảo sát,điều tra
+Youth


Organization (n)
Tổ chức Đoàn
<b>What do you </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about the top
ten most popular activities which the American
teenagers like to do in their freetime.Before the new
lesson I would like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Teenager (n) [Example/Real Person]
+Survey (n) [Translation]


+Youth Organization (n) [Translation]
+Scout (n) [Translation]


+Musical Instrument (n) [Translation/Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”


_Asks the students to guess what activities the American
teenagers like to do in their free time.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B2</b>


<b>_Asks the students to works in groups and do the exercise</b>
Matching:


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1.Eat a.old people with their


shopping or cleaning



2.Attend b.models of things such as


cars or planes


3.Learn c.things such as stamps or


coins


4.Go d.to music


5.Watch e.the movies


6.Go to f.television


7.Listen g.shopping


8.Collect h.to play a musical instrument


such as the guitar


9.Make i.Youth organization such as


scouts and guides


10.Help j.in fast food restaurants.


_Calls some students to read their answers.


_Asks some students to write their answers on the board.



_Listen and
guess the
lesson


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess
_Present their
ideas


_Work in
groups


_Read their
answers
_Write the
answers


TN


+Scout (n)


Hướng đạo sinh
+Musical


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<b>(7ms)</b>



<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks the students to read the answers and check their
guessing.


_Has the students work in groups and ask and answer
about what each person like to do in their free time and
make a survey(Choose the top ten most popular
activities).


_Calls some students to read their results before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes if necessary.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and make a list about
the most popular activities which the Vietnamese
teenagers like to do.


_Calls some students to read their results.



_Asks some students to go to the board and write their
results


_Corrects the mistakes if necessary.


<b>* Play the game “Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Asks the students to write their most activity in a small
paper and then collect them.


_Reads the papers and the students guess who that is.
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise B2


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Read and
check
_Work in
groups
_Read their
results
_Correct
_Work in
pairs



_Read their
results
_Write their
results
_Correct
_Work in
pairs
_Guess
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







<b>---UNIT 6 </b> <b>: AFTER SCHOOL</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” Let’s
Go”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to give an invitation,accept and
refuse it.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of relaxing.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Join,Wedding,Thanks anyway.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple present tense.
_ Would you like + To infinitive…?
_ Yes,I love to.


_ It’s my pleasure.
_ You are welcome.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills



<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 6: After School -Lesson 6 :B_Let’s Go (B3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 6: After School -Lesson 5 :B_Let’s Go (B2)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>



<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL</b>
<b>LESSON 6 :B_LET’S GO (B3)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Matching:</b>


_Divides the students into two teams and has them
choose one presentative to go to the board and do
“Matching”.Which team finishes first ,it is the winner.


_Play the
game



<b>UNIT 6: AFTER</b>
<b>SCHOOL</b>


<b>LESSON 6:</b>
<b>B_LET’S GO</b>
<b>(B3)</b>


<b>Period 37</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


A B


1.Would you like a.I’m going to a wedding


on Sunday.


2.I’ll see you b.join us?


3.Will you c.to come to my house for


lunch?


4.I will call d.on Monday.


5.I’d love to,but e.you tomorrow.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>



<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue about the
ways of Nga,Lan and Hoa give an invitation ,accept and
refuse it.Before the new lesson I would like to introduce
some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To Join (v) [Translation]


+Wedding (n) [Example/Translation]
+Thanks anyway : [Translation/Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”


_Introduces the students some ways of giving an
invitation,accepting and refusing it.


a) Giving an invitation:


+Would you like + To infinitive…?


Ex: Would you like to come to my house for lunch?
+What about + V-ing..?


Ex: What about coming to my house for lunch?
+How about + Ving…?



Ex: How about coming my house for lunch?
b) Accepting an invitation


+Yes,I love to.
+It’s my pleasure.
+I will.


+O.K
c)


+I’d love to,but I…….
+I’m sorry…


+Sorry,I can’t….
+I’m not sure.


_Asks the students to guess what Nga,Lan and Hoa say
in the dialogue.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B3</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to listen to the tape and check their
prediction


_Has three students to practice the dialogue before the



_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy
_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
check
_Practice the
Tiệc cưới


+Thanks anyway
: Duø sao cũng
cảm ơn


II.Structures:
1. Some ways of


making an


invitation,accepti
ng and refusing
it.



a) Giving an
invitation:


+Would you like
+ To infinitive…?
Ex: Would you
like to come to
my house for
lunch?


+What about +
V-ing..?


Ex: What about
coming to my
house for lunch?
+How about +
Ving…?


Ex: How about
coming my house
for lunch?


b) Accepting an
invitation


+Yes,I love to.


+It’s my



pleasure.
+I will.
+O.K
c)


+I’d love to,but
I…….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


class.


_Asks the students to make a similar dialogue by
changing “<i><b>for lunch</b></i>” into “<i><b>birthday party</b></i>”


_Calls three students to practice the dialogue before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes if necessary.



<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and make an
invitation as following,using the structure of inviting:
Refusing () ,Accepting()


1) go/birthday party// ()



A:---
B:---2) go/swim/after school// ()



A:---
B:---3)help/old people//()


A:---


_Calls some pairs to practice before the class.


_Asks some students to go to the board and write their
roles


_Corrects the mistakes if necessary.


<b>* Play the game “Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Asks the students to say the name of the person making
an invitation as follwing:



A: Would you like to come to my house for lunch?
B :---(tell the name)


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B2


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


dialogue
_Work in
groups
_Practice
_Correct
_Work in
pairs


_Roleplay
_Write
_Correct
_Work in
pairs


_Listen and
copy


_Listen



<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>




<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>








</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>Date Of Preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date Of Teaching</b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes</b> <b>: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review the vocabulary and structures form unit 4 to unit 6.



<b>_Language function:</b>


+By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do exercises relating to the structures they have
learned.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To help students have their habit of revising the old lesson.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills.


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Knowing how to solve the exercises in the book.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Pictures, Revision,Questions and Answers,Make Sentences,Gap-Fill,
Make Dialogue,Correction,Matching


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Charts,Pictures,Cards,Mini-Board.


<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Language Focus”



<b>5. Previous exercises</b>: Unit 6 _ B :Let’s Go(B3)


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization: (2ms)</b>
<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson: (43ms)</b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps And</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’ Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I. </b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the </b>
<b>new </b>


<b>materials</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>UNIT: LANGUAGE FOCUS 2</b>


<b>I. Lead -in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Matching”</b>


_Gives some pictures and phrases and
asks the students to match with each other
correctly.


* Some phrases:


+ Doing her homework


_Play the
game


<b>UNIT :LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>2</b>


<b>Period: 38</b>
<b>I.Revision:</b>


1) The present continuous
tense:



<b>a) Form</b>:


<b>S + Is/Am/Are +Ving </b>


Example:


•I am playing soccer now.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<b>(13ms)</b>


<b>+ </b>Writing an essay
+ Reading a newspaper
+ Cooking dinner
+ Playing soccer
+ Kicking the ball


<b>+ </b>Running


_Introduces the new lesson “Now, we are
going to review the vocabulary as well as
the structures from unit 4 to unit 6”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>* Revision:</b>


_Reviews the students the present
continuous tense:


<b>+ Form</b>:



<b>S + Is/Am/Are +Ving </b>


Example:


•I am playing soccer now.


+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express an action


happening at speaking. There are always
some adverbs such as “Now,At present,At
speaking,At the moment.”


_Reminds the students of


determiners”This,That,These,Those”


<b>+ This : (Short distance) Đây là</b>
<b>+ That :(long distance) Đó là</b>


<b>+ These (The plural of This) Những cái </b>
<b>này là</b>


<b>+ Those :(The plural of That) Những cái </b>
<b>đó là</b>


_Reminds the students of the way of
saying the time.


<b>1) Giờ chẵn:</b>



<b>It’s + số giờ (số đếm) +o’clock.</b>


Ex: 7:00 It’s seven o’clock.


<b>2) Giờ lẻ:</b>
<b>a) Giờ hơn:</b>


<b>It’s +Số Phút + Past + Số giờ.</b>


Ex: 7:10 It’s ten past seven.


<b>b) Giờ kém:</b>


<b>It’s + Số phút + To + Số giờ.</b>


Ex: 7:50 ( 8 giờ kém mười)
It’s ten to eight.


<b>* Note:</b>


_Có cách nói đơn giản nhất là:


<b>It’s + Giờ + Phút</b>


Ex: 7:20


It’s seven twenty.


_Reminds the students of subjects.



_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and


There are always some
adverbs such as “Now,At
present,At speaking,At the
moment.”


2) Determiners”This,That,
These,Those”


<b>+ This : (Short distance) Đây</b>
<b>là</b>


<b>+ That :(long distance) Đó là</b>
<b>+ These (The plural of This) </b>
<b>Những cái này là</b>


<b>+ Those :(The plural of </b>
<b>That) Những cái đó là</b>


3)The way of saying the time.



<b>1) Giờ chẵn:</b>


<b>It’s + số giờ (số đếm) </b>
<b>+o’clock.</b>


Ex: 7:00 It’s seven o’clock.


<b>2) Giờ lẻ:</b>
<b>a) Giờ hơn:</b>


<b>It’s +Số Phút + Past + Số </b>
<b>giờ.</b>


Ex: 7:10 It’s ten past seven.


<b>b) Giờ kém:</b>


<b>It’s + Số phút + To + Số giờ.</b>


Ex: 7:50 ( 8 giờ kém mười)
It’s ten to eight.


<b>* Note:</b>


_Có cách nói đơn giản nhất
là:


<b>It’s + Giờ + Phút</b>



Ex: 7:20


It’s seven twenty.
4) Subjects.


+Physical education (n) Môn
Thể Dục


+Geography (n) Mơn Địa Lý
+Chemistry (n) Mơn Hóa Học
+English (n) Mơn Tiếng Anh
+Math (n) Mơn Tốn


+History (n) Mơn Lịch Sử
5) Adverbs of frequency:
a) <b>Meanings</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b>(15ms)</b>


+Physical education (n) Môn Thể Dục
+Geography (n) Môn Địa Lý


+Chemistry (n) Mơn Hóa Học
+English (n) Mơn Tiếng Anh
+Math (n) Mơn Tốn


+History (n) Mơn Lịch Sử


_Reminds the students of adverbs of
frequency:



a) <b>Meanings</b>


+ Never : Không bao giờ
+Seldom :Hiếm khi
+Always :Luôn Luôn
+ Usually: Thường Thường
+ Sometimes:Thỉnh thoảng


<b>b) Positions:</b>


+ Trước động từ thường:
Ex: I often go to school.


+Sau động từ TOBE và Trợ động từ:
Ex: I am never late for school.


_Reminds the students of some ways of
making suggestions and accepting or
refusing them.


<b>a) Suggestions:</b>


+ Let’s + V bare infinitive


+ Should we + Vbare infinitive…?
+ Would you like +To infinitive…?


<b>b) Acception:</b>



+ O.K
+I’d love to


<b>c) Refusion</b>


+I’m sorry
+I can’t


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>*Activity1:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the exercise 1 on page 68.


_Calls some students to read their
answers.


_Asks the students to go to the board and
write their answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


+ Is doing <b>+ </b>Iswriting
+ Is reading + Is cooking
+ Are playing + Is kicking


<b>+ </b>Is running


<b>*Activity2:</b>



<b>_</b>Hangs the pictures on the board.


copy


_Listen and
copy


_Listen and
copy


_Work in
pairs


_Read before
the class
_Write their
answers
_Correct


_Look at the


<b>b) Positions:</b>


+ Trước động từ thường:
Ex: I often go to school.
+Sau động từ TOBE và Trợ
động từ:


Ex: I am never late for school.


6) Some ways of making
suggestions and accepting or
refusing them.


<b>a) Suggestions:</b>


+ Let’s + V bare infinitive
+ Should we + Vbare
infinitive…?


+ Would you like +To
infinitive…?


<b>b) Acception:</b>


+ O.K
+I’d love to


<b>c) Refusion</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<b>_</b>Has the students look at the pictures and
tell the class whether the distance is short
or long.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and fill
in the blanks with the correct determiners
in the exercise 2 on page 68.


_Calls some students to read their answers
before the class



_ Corrects their mistakes.
*Answers:


b)This_That_This c)Those_These_Those
d)Those_These


<b>* Activity 3:</b>


<b>_</b>Hangs the picture on the board and ask
the students what time is it? (in each
o’clock) in the exercise 3 on page 69
_Calls some students to read the time in
English


_Asks the students to write the time on the
board.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


+ b) Seven fifteen(a quarter past seven)
+ c) ten thirty(half past ten)


+ d) Six forty-five.(a quarter to seven)


<b>* Activity 4:</b>


<b>_</b>Hangs the pictures on the board and
gives some subjects.



_Asks the students to work in pairs and
match the picture with the correct subjects
in the exercise 4 on page 70


_Calls some students to go to the board
and write their answers.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) Physical educationn b) Chemistry
c) Math d) Geography
e) English f) History


<b>* Activity 5:</b>


<b>_</b>Hangs the chart on the board and asks the
students to look at the chart and tell the
adverbs of frequency for each phrase.
_Asks some students to go to the board
and write the sentences.


_Corrects the mistakes.
* Answers:


a) Ba seldom rides a bike to school.


picture
_Listen and


do as directed
_Work in
pairs


_Read their
answers
_Correct


_Look at the
picture
_Do as
directed
_Write the
time
_Correct


_Look at the
pictures
_Works in
pairs


_Write their
answers
_Correct


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>(3ms)</b>


<b></b>
<b>II.Conso-lidation</b>



<b>(2ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


b) Ba always practices the guitar after
school.


c) Ba usually does his homework in the
evening.


d) Ba sometimes plays computer games.


<b>* Activity 6:</b>


_Asks three pairs to practice the dialogues
on page 71.


<b>_</b>Hangs the chart on the board and


explains the students the mark() means


“Agree” and the mark() means


“Disagree”.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and
make the dialogues



_Calls some pairs to roleplay the
dialogues.


_Corrects the mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks some pairs to go to the board and
write the dialogues they have made.
_Corrects their mistakes.


_Asks one student to tell the content of the
lesson before the class.


_Asks the students to:


+ Redo the exercises in their books.
+ Do the exercises in their workbooks.
+ Review for the next test


_Remarks the students’study.


_Practice the
dialogues
_Look at the
chart


_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay


_Correct
_Write the
dialogues
_Correct
_One tells the
content
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







<b> </b>


<b>TEST 2</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>Date Of Preparation</b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date Of Teaching</b> <b>:</b>


<b>Classes</b> <b>: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review knowledge they’ve learnt from unit 4 to unit 6.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+To enable the students to use previous knowledge to do the test and through the test the teacher can know
the students’ knowledge.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To educate the students aware the importance of learning English and use it in communication.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills



<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Paying attention to learning English.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Multiple choice,Gap-Fill,True-False,Rearrangement,Correction.


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Papers


<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Test”


<b>5. Previous exercises :</b>”Language focus”


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization:</b>


<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson: (45ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<b>I. Multiple Choice: (3ms) </b>



<i><b>Example:</b>I like………to music</i>. a.<i>listen b.to listen </i><i> .listening d.listened </i>


1.What are you ---? a.do b.does c.doing d.doesing
2.I enjoy---volleyball. a.to play b.play c.playing d.played


3.Let’s---some computer games. a.play b.to play c.playing d.played


4.What should we----this evening? a.doing b.to do c.do d.did
5.Would you like---? a.come b.to come c.coming d.came
6.What about---to the movies? a.to go b.going c.go d.went
7.Her group---rehearing a play. a.is b.am c.are d.were
8.What is your---subject? a.liking b.loving c.lovely d.favorite
9.Can I----you? a.to help b.help c.helping d.helped
10.They are on the racks---the middle. a.at b.in c.on d.with
11.---can I find the math books,please? a.What b.Where c.When d.How


12.How---books does it have? a.much b.few c.many d.a few
<b>II. Reading the text and then answer the questions below : (4ms) </b>


At twenty-five past nine,the bell rings and all the students go into the yard.It’s time for recess.They are
all happy and excited.They meet their friends and have some fun.Many are talking about the last lass,or last night
movie.Some are eating and drinking as well as chatting.Some students are playing games like blindman’s bluff or
catch.Some boys and girls are playing marbles and some girls are skipping rope.But the most popular activity is
talking.The yard is very noisy until the bell rings.Then everyone goes indoors and classes begin again.


<b>Questions :</b>


13. What time does the bell rings ? 13.
14. Are they happy and excited when the bell rings? 14.


---15. What is the most popuplar activity? 15.
---16. Is the yard noisy until the bell rings ? 16.
<b>---III.Writing: (3ms)</b>


<b>A.Rearrange these words to make correct sentences : (1,5ms)</b>
Ex : <i>don’t/ her/ know</i> / <i>I </i>.  I don’t know her.


17. never/they/have/time/whole/to play/a game. 17.
---18. do/you/usually do/what/at recess? 18.
---19. what/do/after school/do/usually/you? 19.
<b>---B.Supply the verbs in brackets with the present progressive tense : (1,5ms)</b>


Ex : They (drink).  They are drinking.


20. I (do) my math homework. 20. ---
21. He ( learn) to play the guitar. 21.
---22. They (eat ). 22.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<b>end----ANSWERS OF TEST 2 (ENGLISH 7)</b>



<b>QUESTIONS ANSWERS</b> <b>MARKS</b>


<b>1</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>2</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>3</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>4</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25</b>



<b>5</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>6</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>7</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>8</b> <b>D</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>9</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>10</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>11</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,25</b>


<b>12</b> <b>C</b> <b>0,25 </b>


<b>13</b> <b>At the twenty-five past nine.</b> <b>1</b>


<b>14</b> <b>Yes,they are.</b> <b>1</b>


<b>15</b> <b>The most popular activity is talking.</b> <b>1</b>


<b>16</b> <b>Yes,it is.</b> <b>1</b>


<b>17</b> <b>They never have time to play a whole game.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>18</b> <b>What do you usually do at recess ?</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>19</b> <b>What do you usually do after school ?</b> <b>0,5</b>



<b>20</b> <b>I am doing my math homework.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>21</b> <b>He is learning to play the guitar.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>22</b> <b>They are eating.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>TỔNG CỘNG</b> <b>10 điểm</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<b>THE QUALIFICATION TABLE</b>


<b> Classes</b> <b> Good</b> <b> Fair</b> <b> Average</b> <b> Weak</b> <b> Bad</b>
<b>7A</b>


<b>7A</b>
<b>7A</b>
<b>7A</b>
<b>7A</b>
<b>7A</b>


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>







<b>---3.Can improve </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>



<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 1 : A _ STUDENTS’ WORK (A1)</b>
<b>Period : 40</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” The World
of Work”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about the students’ work.
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of time.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> To be late for,Vacation,Have fun,Together.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple future tense.
_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills



<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to have a suitable timetable to study and relax.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Rub Out And Remember,Game.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 1 :A_Students’s Work (A1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Test


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 1 :A_STUDENTS’ WORK (A1)</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>


<b>WORLD</b> <b>OF</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>
<b>(10ms)</b>
<b>(12ms)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>


_Asks the students some questions:


+What time do your classes start?
+What time do they finish?


+For how many hours a day do you do your homework?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue between
Hoa and her uncle about schoolwork.Before learning the
new lesson I would like to introduce you some new
words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To be late for: [Translation]
+Vacation (n) [Translation]
+Have fun +Ving : [Translation]
+Together. [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


<b>_Asks the students to guess the information about Hoa</b>


<b>Information</b> <b>After</b>


<b>reading</b>


1.Hoa’s classes starts at---



---2.They finish at---


---3.Hoa often---after school.
---4.Her summer vacation starts in---
---5.The summer vacation last for---
6.Hoa will---during her vacation
---_Calls some students to read their guessing.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A1.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) and check their
guessing.


_Asks two students to roleplay the dialogue before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Asks the students to work in groups of 4 and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Calls some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Gives feedback


*Answers:


a) Hoa’s classes start at 7.


b) They finish at a quarter past eleven.


c) She does her homework about two hours a day.


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
guess
_Read their
guessing
_Listen and
check
_Roleplay
_Corrects
_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers


_Write their
sentences
_Correct
<b>A_STUDENTS’</b>
<b>WORK (A1)</b>
<b>Period 40</b>
I.New words:
+To be late for:
Trễ…..


+Vacation (n) Kì
nghỉ


+To Have fun
+Ving : Có niềm
vui…


+Together: Cùng
với nhau


II.Answers:


a) Hoa’s classes
start at 7.


b) They finish at a


quarter past


eleven.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


d) She will visit her parents on their farm during her
vacation.


e) Students’ answers.
f) Students’ answers.
g) Students’ Answers.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “Noughts And Crosses”</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Noughts And
Crosses”,Using the present continuous tense.


Do home work Summer


vacation June



Classes finish Go and see Three months


Classes start School year start Help their


parents


_Asks the students to summarize the content of the
dialogue


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A1


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit 7: A 2,3
_Remarks the students’study.


_Do as
directed


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>







<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 2 : A _ STUDENTS’ WORK (A2,3)</b>
<b>Period : 41</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” The
world of work”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about some vacations in the
USA and in Vietnam and use the comparison of noun well in reality.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of vacations



<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Find,(A) Few,Tet holiday,New year,Easter,Independence Day,Thanksgiving
,Christmas,Spend


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The comparision of noun.
_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to relax after school.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Using Pictures,Matching,Game,Mime


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 2 :A_Students’ work(A2,3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 2 :A_Students’ Work (A1)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings



<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>


<b>Presenta-UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 2 :A_STUDENTS’ WORK (A2,3)</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>
<b>(10ms)</b>
<b>(12ms)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Network”</b>


_Divides the class into two groups.


_Asks the students to go to the board and list as many as
possible vacations in Vietnam.(Vietnamese is
acceptable)


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a leson about
vacations in The USA and compare with the vacations in
Vietnam.”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To Find (v) [Translation]
+(A) Few(a) [Translation]


+Tet holiday(n) [Picture/Example]
+New year(n) [Picture/Example]
+Easter(n) [Translation]



+Independence Day(n) [Example/Translation]
+Thanksgiving(n) [Translation]


+Christmas(n) [Picture/Example]
+To Spend (v) [Translation]


_Introduces the students the comparision of nouns:
Ex: You have fewer vacations than American students.
+ S1 + V + Adj + ER + Nouns +Than +S2


_Hangs a chart and asks the students to look at the chart
and guess which sentence is true or false.


1) Vietnamese students have fewer vacations than
American students.


2) Ameriocan students have the longest vacations in the
winter.


3) They don’t have Tet holiday.


4)Their most important vacation is New Year’s Day.
5) They usually spend their time with their families on
Thanksgiving and Christmas.


_Calls some students to present their ideas.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A2.</b>



<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape and check their
guessing.


_Play the
game
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
copy


_Do a s
directed
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
check
<b>WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 2:</b>
<b>A_STUDENTS’</b>
<b>WORK?(A2,3)</b>
<b>Period 41</b>
I.New words:
+To Find (v) Tìm
thấy,nhận thấy
+(A) Few(a) Một ít
+Tet holiday(n) Lễ


tết


+New year(n) Năm
mới


+Easter(n) Lễ phục
sinh


+Independence
Day(n) Ngày Quốc
Khánh


+Thanksgiving(n)
Lễ tạ ơn


+Christmas(n)
Giáng sinh


+To Spend (v) Trải
qua,tiêu xài


II.Answers:
A2


a) Summer vaction
is the longest in
America.


b) During his
vacation,Tim


spends time with
his family.


c) Vietnamese
students have
fewer vacations
than American
students.


A3.


a) Thanksgiving
b) Independence
Day


c) New Year’s
Eve(Day)


d) Christmas.
<b>Vacations in </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>



<b>(5ms)</b>


_Has the students work in groups and answer the
questions in the book.


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.
*Answers:


a) Summer vaction is the longest in America.


b) During his vacation,Tim spends time with his family.
c) Vietnamese students have fewer vacations than
American students.


<b>A3.</b>


_Hangs the pictures on the board and asks the students to
tell the name of the public holidays in Vietnamese.
_Calls some students to read their ideas.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape and write the
name of the public holiday they hear.


_Plays the tape for the first time.


_Plays the second one and then asks the students to
compare their answers with their friends.



_Calls some students to read their answers.


_Plays the last one sentence by sentence and check the
answers.


_Gives feedback.
* Answers:
a) Thanksgiving
b) Independence Day
c) New Year’s Eve(Day)
d) Christmas.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “Matching”</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Matching”


_Has the students to match the holidays with the correct
time in Vietnam.


A B


1.Tet holiday a. 3 months


2.Summer vacation b.1 day


3.Independence Day c.2 days



4.30th<sub> April & May Day</sub> <sub>d.one week</sub>


_Asks the students to tell some the public holidays in the
USA


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A2,3


+Learn by heart the adverbs
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Correct


_Listen and
answer
_Read their
ideas


_Do as
directed
_Listen and
do


_Compare
_Read


_Check the
answer
_Correct


_Listen and
do as directed


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 3 : A _ STUDENTS’ WORK(A4)</b>
<b>Period : 42</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students some more new words and structures relating to the topic”
Students’ Work”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to talk about their work and the
time they work.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of work.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Typical,Period,Keen,Review,Definitely,Lazy.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The Comparision of nouns.
_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills



<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to choose a suitable timetable for them


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 3 :A_Students’ Work(A4)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 2 :A_Students’ Work (A2,3)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>



<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 3 :A_STUDENTS’ WORK (A4)</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>


<b>WORLD</b> <b>OF</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>new</b>
<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>
<b>(10ms)</b>
<b>(12ms)</b>
<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Chatting:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students some questions:
+ What do you do everyday ?



+ Is your work at school hard or O.K?
+ How many hours a day do you study?
+ Do you have to do a lot of homework?


<b>* Using the picture in the book:</b>


_Shows the picture and ask the students:
+What is she doing ?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about Hoa and
how her work is.Before the new lesson I would like to
introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Typical(a) [Transaltion]
+Period (n) [Example]
+Keen (a) [Synonym]


+To Review (v) [Explanation/Translation]
+Definitely(adv) [Translation]


+Lazy(a) [Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”



_Asks the students to guess about Hoa’s information.
1)Hoa goes to school---days a week.


2)She has---periods a day.
3)She works---hours a week.


4)She has about---hours of homework
everyweek.


5)She works---hours a week before tests.
_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A4.</b>


<b>*Play the game”Lucky Number”</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (A4) and check their
guessing


_Calls one student to read the text again.


_Divides the class into two groups and has the students
play the game(using the questions in the book).Which
team answers most correct answers is the winner.


1)_a 2)_Lucky Number
3)_c 4)_b



5)_Lucky Number 6)_d


_Listen and
answer
_Look and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
check
_One reads
the text
_Work in
groups
<b>LESSON 3:</b>
<b>A_STUDENTS’</b>
<b>WORK (A4)</b>
<b>Period 42</b>
I.New words:
+Typical(a) Tiêu


biểu,điển hình
+Period (n) Tiết
học


+Keen (a) Thích
+To Review (v)
n tập


+Definitely(adv)
Chính xác,chắc
chắn


+Lazy(a) Lười
biếng


II.Answers:


a)People think
students have an
easy life because
they only work a
few hours a day
and have long
vacations.


b)Hoa works about
20 hours a week.It
is fewer than most
workers’ work.
c)Students’


answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b>


<b>4</b> <b>5</b> <b>6</b>


_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Has some students to go to the board and write the
answers.


*Answers:


a)People think students have an easy life because they
only work a few hours a day and have long vacations.
b)Hoa works about 20 hours a week.It is fewer than most


workers’ work.


c)Students’ answers.
d) No,he doesn’t.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>
<b>_</b>Gives the papers


Information Hoa You


1)Schools days a
week


2)Periods a day
3)School hours a
week


4)Hours of


homework a
week


5)Working hours
a week





-



---
-




---_Asks the students to read the text again and fill in the
information in the box.


_Calls some students to read their table.
_Corrects the mistakes.


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lessson
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise A4


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Read their
answers
_Correct
_Write the
answers


_Work in
groups



_Read their
table


_Correct
_Tell the
content


_Listen and
copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>



<b>LESSON 4 : B _ THE WORKER (B1)</b>
<b>Period : 43</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” The
Worker”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to describe some jobs,compare
them and know the importance of them.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of working.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Photo,Take care of,Part-time,Local,Homeless,Mechanic,Shift,Day off.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ Comparision of Nouns


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to choose a suitable job.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach



<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World of Work -Lesson 4 :B_The Worker (B1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 3 :A_Students’ Work (A4)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>



<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 4 :B_THE WORKER (B1)</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>
<b>WORLD OF</b>
<b>WORK </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Question and Answer:</b>


_Asks the students some questions:


+How many days does Hoa go to school a week?
+ How many hours does Hoa work at school a week?


+How many hours does Hoa do her homework a week?
+How many hours does Hoa work at school a week?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says:“It’s students’work.But what about the
worker.Now, we are going to learn a letter about Tim’s
family and the jobs his parents do.Before the new lesson
I would like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Photo (n) [Realia]


+Take care of(v) [Translation]
+Part-time(a) [Explanation]
+Local(a) [Explanation]
+Homeless(a) [Example]
+Mechanic(a) [Picture]
+Shift(n) [Example]
+Day off(n) [Example]


_Checks the students’s understanding the new words by
using <b>“Matching”</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the students the comparision of noun
Ex: I work more hours than Hoa.


<b>S1 +V + More(less) + Noun(s) + S2</b>



_Asks the students to predict the main ideas of passages
in the letter.


Prediction Main ideas While reading



P1---
P2---
P3---
P4---a)Mr.Jones’s
work.


b)Mr. Jones’s
vacation time
c)Tim


introduces his
family
d)Mrs.Jones’s
work

P1---
P2---
P3---
P4---_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>



<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (B1) and check their
guessing.


_Calls one student to read the text again.


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed


_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Check their
guessing
_One reads
<b>B_THE</b>
<b>WORKER (B1)</b>
<b>Period 43</b>
I.New words:
+Photo (n) Bức ảnh
+Take care of(v)
Chăm sóc



+Part-time(a) Bán
thời gian


+Local(a) Thuộc
về địa phương
+Homeless(a) Vô
gia cư


+Mechanic(a) Thợ
máy


+Shift(n) Ca làm
việc


+Day off(n) Ngày
nghỉ


II.Structures:


<b>_</b> The comparision
of noun


Ex: I work more
hours than Hoa.


<b>S1 +V +</b>
<b>More(less)</b> <b>+</b>
<b>Noun(s) + S2</b>



III.Answers:
B1


a)Mrs Jone works
at home.But three
mornings a week
she works
part-time at a local
supermarket.
b)She(together
with other women)
cooks lunch for
homeless people
once a week.
c)Mr.John is a
mechanic.He
repairs machines in
a factory.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>* Play the game Lucky Number:</b>


_Divides the students into two groups and play the game
(Using the questions in the book).Which team answers
more is the winner.



1 2 3 4


5 6 7 8


1)Lucky Number 2)_a
3)_c 4)_d
5)LuckyNumber 6)_b
7)_Lucky Number 8)_e


_Has some students to go to the board and write the
answers.


*Answers:


a)Mrs Jone works at home.But three mornings a week
she works part-time at a local supermarket.


b)She(together with other women) cooks lunch for
homeless people once a week.


c)Mr.John is a mechanic.He repairs machines in a
factory.


d) He works about 40 hours a week.


e)The Jones family always goes to the Florida on
vacation.They have a great time there.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>



<b>* Play the game “Who ,Where,How Long”</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in groups and play the game.


Statements Who Where How Long


1) Repair
machines
2)Work at
home
3)Work
about 40
hours a
week
4)Go to
Florida
5)Play golf
6)7 public
holidays


_Calls some students to read their sentences
_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson


the text
_Work in
groups


_Write the
answers



_Work in
groups


_Read their
sentences
_Tell the
content


always goes to the


Florida on


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B1


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
copy


_Listen



<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>



<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 5 : B _ THE WORKER (B2,3)</b>
<b>Period : 44</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>



<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” The
worker”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to describe some jobs,compare
them and know the importance of them.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of jobs.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Feed,Buffalo,Pig,Main,Crop,Rest,Animal,Shed,Coop,Real.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The comparision of nouns.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to choose a suitable job.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 5 :B_The Worker (B2,3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.



<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 4 :B_The Worker (B1)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<i><b>Trường THCS Thị Trấn Phù Mỹ</b></i>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content</b>
<b>Of The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 5 :B_THE WORKER (B2,3)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Using the picture:</b>


_Shows the picture on page 77 and ask the students:
+What is he doing?


+What is his job?


+What are the duties of a farmer?


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “In the last lesson,you learned about the
jobs:housewife,mechanic..Today we will study about
works of a farmer.Before the new lesson I would like to
introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>



+To Feed(v) [Example]
+Buffalo (n) [Picture]
+Pig(n) [Picture]


+Main (a) [Translation]
+Crop (n) [Explanation]
+To Rest (v) [Translation]
+Animal(n) [Example]
+Shed(n) [Explanation]
+Coop(n) [Picture}
+Real(a) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”


_Asks the students to predict which is True or False.
1) Mr.Tuan starts work at 6:30 in the morning.
2) He collects the eggs before having breakfast.
3) Mr.Tuan works in the fields for two hours.
4) He has an hour for lunch.


5) His work usually finishes at 5 p.m


6) He takes a day off when there is less work.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>



_Has the students listen to the tape(B2) and check their
guessing


_Asks the students to read the letter(B1) again and
compare Mr.Tuan’s job with Mr.John’s job.


_Calls some students to read their answers.


_Asks some students to write their answers on the board.
_Gives feedback


Name Hours per


week Days off Vacationtime


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess
_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
check


_Work in
groups
_Read their
answers
_Write the
answers
_Correct


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>
<b>WORLD OF</b>
<b>WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 5:</b>
<b>B_THE</b>
<b>WORKER</b>
<b>(B2,3)</b>
<b>Period 44</b>
I.New words:
+To Feed(v)
Cho ăn


+Buffalo (n)
Con trâu


+Pig(n) Con
heo


+Main (a)
Chính,quan
trọng



+Crop (n) Mùa
vụ


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>






<b> </b>


<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 7 </b> <b>: THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 6 : B _ THE WORKER (B4,5)</b>
<b>Period : 45</b>



<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students some more new words and structures relating to the topic”
The Worker”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to listen for details and fill in the
table about the jobs they hear.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of jobs


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> To be on duty,Annual


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to choose a suitable job.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,



<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 6 :B_The Worker (B4)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 5 :B_The Worker (B2,3)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>



<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>
<b>LESSON 6 :B_THE WORKER (B4,5)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”NetWork”:</b>


_Divides the students into two teams and has them go to
the board and list jobs they know. Which team finishing
more is the winner.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a text about the four
people and their jobs.You listen and complete the table
with the information about jobs,hours per week and
amount of vacation .Before the new lesson I would like
to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+To be on duty: [Translation] Ca làm việc
+Annual(a) [Trnaslation] Hàng năm
+Robot(n) [Picture] Người máy


+To Come true: [Translation] Trở thành hiện thực


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Jumble Words”


_Asks the students to guess the four people’s jobs,hours
per week and amount of vacation.


_Play the
game


_Listen and
guess the
lesson


_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess


<b>UNIT 7: THE</b>
<b>WORLD OF</b>


<b>WORK</b>


<b>LESSON 6:</b>
<b>B_THE</b>
<b>WORKER</b>
<b>(B4,5)</b>
<b>Period 45</b>


I.New words:
+To be on duty:
Ca làm việc
+Annual(a) Hàng
năm


+Robot(n) Người
máy


+To Come true:
Trở thành hiện
thực


Occupations



-
--



-





---

-




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>-(12ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B4</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to listen to the tape and check their
prediction


_Has the students to listen to the tape again and fill in the
table.


_Asks the students to listen to the last one and do the rest
_Has the students compare their answers


_Calls some students to write their answers on the board.
_Plays the tape sentence by sentence and asks the
students to check their answers.



_Corrects the students’ mistakes if necessary.
* Answers:


Name Job Hours per


week Amount ofVacation
Peter


Susan
Jane
Phong


Doctor
Nurse
Shop
assistant
Factory
worker


70
50
35
48


Four weeks
Three
weeks
One week
Two weeks


B5.


_Asks the students to listen to the tape(B5) and focus on
their pronunciation and intonation.


_Has some students read the text again.
_Corrects their mistakes if neccessry.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about their family (About Their jobs,hours
per week and amount of vacation)


_Calls some pairs to practice before the class.


_Asks some students to go to the board and write their
roles


_Corrects the mistakes if necessary.


<b>* Play the game “Find Somebody Who”</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs :one asks a question


_Present their
ideas


_Listen and
check


_Listen and
do


_Listen and
do as directed
_Compare
_Write
_Listen and
check
_Correct


_Listen and
focus


_Read the
text


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


and the other says the name of the person.
A: Who works 70 hours a week?


B :---(tell the name)


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B4,5


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Roleplay


_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>






<b>---2.Bad points</b>






<b>---3.Can improve </b>







<b>---UNIT 8 </b> <b>: PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 1 : A _ ASKING THE WAY (A1,2)</b>
<b>Period : 46</b>


<b>Date of preparation </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Date of teaching </b> <b>:</b>
<b>Classes </b> <b>: 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” Places”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer the directions
_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Souvenir Shop,Go straight ahead,Take the…..street,On the left(right),Opposite
,In front of


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ Imperative


_ Could you show/tell me---?


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>



_Knowing their town well


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Rub Out And Remember,Game.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: Places -Lesson 1 :A_Asking The Way (A1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 7: The World Of Work -Lesson 6 :B_The Worker (B4,5)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>



<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(10ms)</b>


<b>UNIT 8: PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 1 :A_ASKING THE WAY (A1,2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Matching:</b>


_Divides the students into two groups and ask them to go
to the board and match the words with the correct
definitions:


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>



1)A place to get money
2)A place to catch train
3)A place to see a doctor
4)A place to buy food
5)A place to stay


6)A place to mail a letter


a) market
b)hospital
c)bank
d)station
e)post office
f)hotel


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn two dialogues
between a tourist and Nga and Lan.The tourist wants to
go to a place but she doesn’t know the way to get
there,so Nga and Lan show the way to her.Before
learning the new lesson I would like to introduce you
some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Souvenir Shop(n) [Picture]


+Go straight ahead :[Translation/mime]


+Take the first street:[Translation]
+Take the second street:[Translation]
+On the left: [Example/Mime]


+On the right:[Example/Mime]
+Opposite:[Example/Mime]
+In front of:[Mime/Example]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using “Rub Out And Remember”


_Play the
game
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed


<b>UNIT</b> <b>8:</b>
<b>PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 1:</b>
<b>A_ASKING</b>
<b>THE</b>
<b>WAY(A1,2)</b>
<b>Period 46</b>
I.New words:


+Souvenir


Shop(n) Cửa
hàng lưu niệm
+Go straight
ahead :Đi thẳng
+Take the first
street :Rẽ thứ
nhất


+Take the second
street:Rẽ thứ hai
+On the left:
Phía bên trái


+On the


right:Phía bên
phải


+Opposite:Đối
diện


+In front of:Phía
trước


II.Structures:
+ Could you
show me the way
to + Name of


places?


+Could you tell
me how to get


+Name of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>


<b>(4ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


<b>(5ms)</b>


_Introduces the students the way of asking and
answering about the way to get somewhere.


+ Could you show me the way to + Name of places?
+Could you tell me how to get +Name of places?
Example:


+ Could you tell me how to get the post office?


<b>_</b>Asks the students to use the structures and prepositional


phrases above to ask and answer according to the
following map.


_Calls some students to practice asking and answering.
_Has the students read the dialogues in the book and
check if they are the same as the above map.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A2.</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(A1) and focus on
their pronunciation and intonation.


_Asks two students to roleplay the dialogue before the
class.


_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>
<b>* Matching”</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and do the exercise
“Matching”


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1)Thanks a lot


2)Could you tell me how
to get to school?



3)Where is the market?
4)Excuse me.Is there a
hotel near here?


a)Yes.There is a nice one
about 50 m from here.
b)It’s to the left of the
police station.


c)You’re welcome


d)Go straight ahead for
about 300 meters.It’s on
your left.


_Asks the students to tell the structure of asking the way
before the class.


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A1,2


+Learn by heart the new words.
+Prepare the new lesson Unit 8: A3
_Remarks the students’study.


_Listen and
copy


_Listen and


guess
_Practice
_Read and
check
_Listen and
focus


_Roleplay
_Correct
_Do as
directed


_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


Example:


+ Could you tell
me how to get
the post office?


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>
<b>1.Good points :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>---2.Bad points</b>







<b>---3.Can improve </b>










<b>UNIT 8</b>

<b> :PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 2 : A _ ASKING THE WAY (A3)</b>
<b> Period : 47 </b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” Asking
The Way”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to asking and answering about the
way to get somewhere.



_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Bakery,Toy store,Drug store,Shoe store,Police station,


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ Review the structure of asking the way.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing their town well.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Using Pictures,Matching,Game,Mime


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: Places -Lesson 2 :A_Asking The Way(A3)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook, Pictures, Cassette Player,Chart.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?



<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (38ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>(14ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>



<b>LESSON 2 :A_Asking the way (A3)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Brain Storm”</b>


_Divides the class into two groups.


_Asks the students to go to the board and list as many as
possible Prepositions of places.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a lesson about the
positions of some places.Before the new lesson I would
like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Bakery(n) [Picture]
+Toy store(n)[Picture]
+Drug store(n)[Picture]
+Shoe store(n) [Picture]
+Police station(n) [Picture]


_Checks the students’ understanding of new words by
using techniques”Rub Out And Remember”



_Reviews the students some prepositions of places.
_Asks the students to reamrk the places (in the box).
_Calls some students to read their remarks.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A3.</b>


_Play the
game


_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down


_Do a s
directed
_Listen and
answer
_Remark
_Read their
marks.


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 2:</b>


<b>A_ASKING THE</b>
<b>WAY?(A3)</b>



<b>Period 47</b>


I.New words:
+Bakery(n) Cửa
hàng bánh


+Toy store(n)Cửa
hàng đồ chơi
+Drug


store(n)Hiệu thuốc
+Shoe store(n)
Hiệu giày


+Police station(n)
Đồn cảnh sát
II.Answers:
* Answers:


a) Souvenir shop
b) Shoe store


c) hotel


d) drug store
e)hospital
<b>Preositions </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>(8ms)</b>



<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students work in pairs and practice asking and
answering about the places in the box using the structure
of asking where one place is.


+Where is + Name of places?


+It’s---_Calls some students to roleplay before the class.
_Corrects the students’ mistakes.


_Asks the students to look at the map again and then
listen to the tape and write the correct places they hear.
_Plays the tape for the first time.


_Plays the second one and then asks the students to
compare their answers with their friends.


_Calls some students to read their answers.


_Plays the last one sentence by sentence and check the
answers.



_Gives feedback.
* Answers:


a) Souvenir shop b) Shoe store
c) hotel d) drug store
e)hospital


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “Listen And Draw”</b>


_Asks the students to play the game “Listen And Draw”
_Divides the class into two groups:Each team choose two
people.one reads the places by using the prepositions of
places and the other draw the places.Which team
finishing first is the winner.


_Remarks the drawings


_Asks the students to tell the structure of asking some
places and some prepositions of places used in
answering


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A3


+Learn by heart the adverbs
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.



_Work in
groups


_Roleplay
_Correct
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
do


_Do as
directed
_Read
_Check the
answer
_Correct


_Listen and
do as directed


_Listen
_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>






---


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

---


---


<b> </b>


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 8</b>

<b> :</b>

<b>PLACES</b>



<b>LESSON 3 : A _ ASKING THE WAY(A4,5)</b>
<b> Period : 48 </b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students some more new words and structures relating to the topic”
Asking The Way”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the
distance from one place to another.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students love their country.



<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Sure,Way,Coach,Have a guess,How far,It takes sb time to do sth


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ How far is it from---to ----?_It’s
_ The simple present tense.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing the distance between cities in our country.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Make a Dialogue.


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: Places -Lesson 3 :A_Asking The Way (A4,5)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart,picture.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 8: Places -Lesson 2 :A_Asking The Way (A3)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?



<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 3 :A_ASKING THE WAY (A4,5)</b>



<b>I. Lead-in:</b>
<b>* Matching:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to do Matching:


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1)How far is it from your
house to school?


a)About 15 minutes by
bike.


2)How long does it take to
get to school?


b)Go straight ahead.Then
turn right.


3)Could you tell me how


to get to Mai’s house? c)It’s about 6 kilometers.


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says: “Now, we are going to learn a dialogue about
Hoa and Lan who are asking the distance from one place
to another.Before the new lesson I would like to
introduce some new words”



<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Sure (a) [Translation]
+Way(n) [Translation]
+Coach(n) [Picture]


+To have a guess =To guess (v) [Style]
+How far :[Translation]


+It takes sb time to do sth :[Translation]
Ex: It takes me 10 minutes to go to school.


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Jumble Words”


_Reviews the students the way of asking and answering
the distance.


<b>How far is it from---to---?</b>
<b> It’s </b>


about---_Do
Matching
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat


_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 3:</b>


<b>A_ASKING THE</b>
<b>WAY(A4,5)</b>


<b>Period 48</b>


I.New words:
+Sure (a) Chaéc
chaén


+Way(n) Con
đường,cách thức
+Coach (n) xe
ca(khách)


+To have a guess
=To guess (v)
phỏng đoán


+How far: Bao xa
+It takes sb time to
do sth: Chiếm ai
mất bao nhiêu thời


gian để làm gì
Ex: It takes me 10
minutes to go to
school.


II.Structures:


<b>How far is it</b>
<b>from---to---?</b>
<b> It’s</b>
<b></b>


about---Ex: How far is it
from Qui Nhon to
HCM city?


It’s about 800
kilometers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>


Ex: How far is it from Qui Nhon to HCM city?


It’s about 800 kilometers.


_Asks the students to fill in the blank with suitable
question words.


A:---is it from here to the police station?
B: It’s about two kilometers.


A:---does it take to get there by bicycle?
B:About 7 minutes.


A:Could you tell me---get there?


B:Go along this street.Then take the first street on the
right.


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>A4.</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (A4) and focus on
their pronunciation and stress


_Calls two students to roleplay the dialogue.
_Corrects their mistakes if neccesary


<b>A5.</b>



_Hangs the map(on page 82) on the board.


_Has some students tell names on the map and guess the
distance from this city to another.


_Calls some students to tell their ideas.


_Hangs the chart(on page 82) on the board and asks the
students to practise asking and answering the distance.
_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.


_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


* MAPPED DIALOGUE:


_Asks the students to look at the following chart and
make a dialogue by using the structure of asking and
answering about the distance.


<b>A </b><b> B </b>


Vinh-Hue? ---369 km
Hue-Da Nang? ---103 km
Da Nang-Ho Chi Minh? ---935 km
_Asks the students to tell the content of the lessson


_Asks the students to:
+Repractise A4,5



_Fill in the
blanks


_Present their
ideas.


_Listen and
focus


_Roleplay
_Correct the
mistakes
_Tell the
names
_Present
ideas
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Correct
_Work in
pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<b>(3ms)</b> +Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study. _Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>






---


---


---


---


---


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 8</b>

<b> : PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 4 : B _ AT THE POST OFFICE (B1)</b>
<b> Period : 49</b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students new words and structures relating to the topic” At The Post
Office”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the price


and make a polite request.


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of post office.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Would llike,To send,Some,Envelope,Altogether,Stamp,To Cost,Change.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ How much + To be +S?/How much + do/does S + Cost?_S + To be + Price.
_Would like + V bare infinitive/noun


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to mail a letter to their friends.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: Places -Lesson 4 :B_At The Post Office (B1)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise: </b>Unit 8: Places -Lesson 3 :A_Asking The Way (A4,5)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings



<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>



<b>LESSON 4 :B_AT THE POST OFFICE (B1)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play The Game “Net Work”:</b>


_Divides the class into two groups and asks the students
to play the game:


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


<b>_</b>Says”Now, we are going to learn a dialogue happening
at the post office between Liz and Clerk.Before the new
lesson I would like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Would like + Vbare infinitive/noun


=’d like = want (v) [Synonym]
+To send (v) [Example]
+ Some (Det.) [Example}
+Envelope(n) [Realia]
+Altogether (adv) [Translation]
+Stamp(n) [Realia]
+To Cost (v) [Translation]
+Change (n) [Example/Explanation]
_Checks the students’s understanding the new words by


using <b>“Matching”</b>


<b>_</b>Introduces the students the structure of asking and
answering the price.


<b>How much + To be +S?</b>


_Play the
game
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Listen and
copy


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 4:</b>


<b>B_ AT THE POST</b>
<b>OFFICE (B1)</b>
<b>Period 49</b>


I.New words:
+Would like +
Vbare



infinitive/noun
=’d like = want
(v)


Muoán


+To send (v)
Gởi


+ Some (Det.)
Moät vài


+Envelope(n)
Phong bì


+Altogether (adv)
Tất cả,Cùng nhau
+Stamp(n)


Tem


+To Cost (v)
Có giá,đáng giá


+Change (n)


Tiền thừa,dư.
II.Structures:



<b>How much + To</b>
<b>be +S?</b>


<b> How much +</b>
<b>do/does S + Cost?</b>
<b> S + To be +</b>
<b>Price.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b>---(12ms)</b>


<b>(7ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>


<b> How much + do/does S + Cost?</b>
<b> S + To be + Price.</b>


<b>Ex:</b> How much is the envelope?


How much does the envelope cost?
It is 3,000 dong.


<b>* Prediction</b>


_Asks the students to fill in the missing words in the
following sentences which will appear in the dialogue.
1) Liz’d like to



send---2) She
needs---3) The envelopes---dong.
4) The---cost 9,500 dong.
5) They are---altogether.


6) ---15,000 dong.So,the change


is---_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B1</b>


<b>_</b>Has the students listen to the tape (B1) and check their
guessing.


_Calls two students to roleplay the dialogue
_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>* Play the game Lucky Number:</b>


_Divides the students into two groups and play the game
(Using the questions in the book).Which team answers
more is the winner.


<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b>


<b>4</b> <b>5</b> <b>6</b>



1)Lucky Number 2)_a


3)_c 4)_Lucky Number
5)LuckyNumber 6)_b


_Has some students to go to the board and write the
answers.


*Answers:


a)Liz will mail the letter to the USA.
b)She pays 11,500 dong altogether.
c)She receives 3,500 dong in change.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>* Play the game “What And Price”</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in groups and play the
game:One gives a real thing and the other use the
structure of asking and answering the true price .which
team does more is the winner.


_Asks the students to tell the content of the lesson
_Asks the students to:


+Repractise B1


_Guess



_Present their
ideas


_Check their
guessing
_Roleplay
_Correct
_Work in
groups


_Write the
answers


_Work in
groups
_Tell the
content
_Listen and


It is 3,000
dong.


III.Answers:
B1


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<b>work:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.


_Remarks the students’study.


copy
_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>






---


---




---





UNIT 8<b> : PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 5 : B _ AT THE POST OFFICE (B2)</b>
<b> Period : 50</b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>


<b> Classes : 7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students more new words and structures relating to the topic” At The
Post Office”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to understand the dialogue and talk
about the topic “Post Office”


_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of post office


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Local stamp,Oversea mail,Pen pal,Regularly,Phone card


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ The simple present tense


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends and relatives.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: PLaces -Lesson 5 :B_At The Post Office (B2)



<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 8: Places -Lesson 4 :B_At The Post Office (B1)


<b>III. Procedure In Class:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<b>a. Questions :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<i><b>Trường THCS Thị Trấn Phù Mỹ</b></i>
<b>Teaching</b>


<b>Steps &</b>
<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content</b>
<b>Of The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>



<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>(14ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 8: PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 5 :B_AT THE POST OFFICE (B2)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game Matching:</b>


_Divides the class into two groups and play the
game:The teacher uses 2 bags.One has some words
relating to the topic and the other has their
meanings.Which team matches more is the winner.
1) Overseas mail a) Thẻ điện thoại
2)Phone card b) Bưu điện


3)Need c) Tem trong nước
4)Phone d) Cần


5)Post Office e) Gọi điện


6)Local Stamps f) Thư nước ngoài


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>



<b>_</b>Says: “In the last lesson, you learned how to ask and
answer about the price of one or more things .And today
we will study about what Hoa needs in the post
office.Before the new lesson I would like to introduce
some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Local stamp (n) [Realia]
+Overseas mail (n) [Realia]
+Pen pal (n) [Example]
+Regularly (adv) [Translation]
+Phone card (n) [Realia]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Rub Out And Remember”


<b>* Prediction</b>


_Asks the students to guess what Hoa needs from the
post office.


<b>Pre- Questions </b>
<b>While-Listening While-Listening</b>


- a)Why does Hoa need
stamps for overseas mail?



b)--- b)Why does she need a
phone card?


c)--- c)How often does she write
a letter to Tim?


d)--- d)How often does she phone
home?


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


_Has the students listen to the tape(B2) and check their
guessing


_Asks the students to work in groups and play the game


_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and
do as directed
_Guess


_Present their
ideas
_Listen and
check
_Work in
<b>UNÌT</b> <b>8:</b>
<b>PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 5:</b>
<b>B_AT THE</b>
<b>POST</b>


<b>OFFICE(B2)</b>
<b>Period 50</b>


I.New words:
+Local stamp
(n)


Tem trong nước
+Overseas mail
(n) Thư
quốc tế


+Pen pal (n)
Bạn qua thư
+Regularly
(adv)


Một cách đều
đặn



+Phone card
(n)


Thẻ điện thoại
II.Answers:
a) Hoa needs
some local
stamps and


some for


overseas mail
and a phone
card.


b) She needs
stamps for
overseas mail
because she
has a penpal in
America.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>





---



---


---


---


---


<b> </b>


<b> </b>


<b> </b>

<b>UNIT 8</b>

<b> : PLACES</b>


<b>LESSON 6 : B _ AT THE POST OFFICE (B3,4,5)</b>
<b> Period : 51</b>


<b> Date of preparation :</b>
<b> Date of teaching :</b>
<b> Classes :7A</b>
<b>I . Aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>_ Language content:</b>To introduce the students some more new words and structures relating to the topic”
At the Post Office”


<b>_ Language function:</b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to ask and answer about the price
of things at the post office and listen for details and write the correct price they hear.



_ <b>Educational aim:</b> To make the students aware of the importance of the post office.


<b>1.Language : </b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Postcard,Writing pad,Add up,Apart from.


<b>b. Structures:</b> _ Compound Adjectives.


<b>2. Skills:</b> Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor:</b>


_Knowing how to care their friends and relatives.


<b>II . Teacher and Students’Preparation :</b>
<b>1. Method:</b> Communication approach


<b>2. Techniques:</b> Questions And Answers, Translation,Example,Game,


<b>3. Students’ preparation:</b> New lesson Unit 8: Places -Lesson 6 :B_At The Post Office (B3,4,5)


<b>4. Materials needed:</b> Textbook,Cassette Player,Chart.


<b>5. Previous Exercise:</b> Unit 8: Places -Lesson 5 :B_At The Post Office (B2)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>1. Stabilization :(2ms)</b>


<b>a. Warm up :</b> Greetings


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today ?



<b>2. Checking up the previous knowledge: </b>
<b>a. Questions :</b>


<b>b. Keys To The Questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson : (43ms) </b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps &</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the</b>
<b>new</b>


<b>materials:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>UNÌT 8 : PLACES</b>



<b>LESSON 6 :B_AT THE POST OFFICE (B3,4,5)</b>


<b>I. Lead-in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Who Is Quicker”:</b>


_Divides the students into two teams and has them go to
the board and write words they hear(The teacher read
words in vietnamese and the students write in English)
Which team finishing more is the winner.


1.Tem _Stamp
2. Phong Thư _Envelop
3. Thẻ điện thoại _Phone Card
4.Gởi thư _Mail


5.Thư trong nước _Local stamp
6.Thư nước ngoài _Overseas mail


<b>_Introduces the new lesson:</b>


_Shows the pictures in the book(on page 85) and ask the
students what they are.


<b>_</b>Says: “These are the things which Mrs Robinson will
buy.Now, we are going to learn a listening task about the
things Mrs Robinson buy.Before the new lesson I would
like to introduce some new words”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>


<b>_Teaches new words:</b>


+Postcard (n) [Realia]
+Writing pad (n) [Realia]
+To Add up (v) [Translation]
+Apart from(Pre.) [Translation]


_Checks the students’ understanding by using the
techniques “Matching”


_Introduces the students compound adjectives.
Ex: A phone card:50,000 dong


A fifty thousand dong phone card


_Asks the students to do “Matching”


A B


_Play the
game
_Listen and
answer
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
repeat
_Copy down
_Listen and


do as directed
_Listen and
copy
_Do matching
<b>UNÌT</b> <b>8:</b>
<b>PLACES</b>
<b>LESSON 6:</b>
<b>B_AT THE</b>
<b>POST OFFICE</b>
<b>(B3,4,5)</b>


<b>Period 51</b>


I.New words:
+Postcard (n)
Bưu thiếp


+Writing pad (n)
Tập giấy viết
+To Add up (v)
Cộng vào
+Apart
from(Pre.) Ngoài
ra,bên cạnh
II.Structures:
1.Compound
adjectives:


Ex: A phone
card:50,000 dong


A fifty


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<b>(14ms)</b>


1.I would like
2.Here you ….


3.How much is that ……?
4.That is…..


5.Here’s……..


a) your change


b) five local stamps and
two stamps for America.
c) are.


d) seventy-five thousand
dong


e) altogether


_Calls some students to present their ideas before the
class.


_Corrects


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>
<b>B3</b>



<b>_</b>Asks the students to read the dialogue between Hoa and
Clerk and fill in the blank with an approriate word.
_Has the students compare their answers


_Has some students read their answers before the class.
_Calls some students to write their answers on the board.
_Corrects the students’ mistakes if necessary.


Answers:
1. Like
2. are
3. much
4. is
5. change


_Asks the students to work in pairs and then make up
similar dialogues,using the words in the box.


_Calls some pairs to roleplay before the class.


<b>B4.</b>


_Shows the pictures on page 85 and ask the students to
guess their price.


_Calls some students read their price before the class.
_Asks the students to listen the tape and check their
guessing.



_Has them listen again and write the correct price.
_Gets them listen for the last one and then do the rest.
_Calls some students to read their answers before the
class.


_Corrects their mistakes.


<b>B5</b>.


_Asks the students to work in pairs and practice asking
and answering about the price,using the questions in the
book.


_Has some students practice before the class.


_Present their
ideas


_Listen and
check
_Listen and
do


_Compare
_Listen and
do as directed
_Write


_Listen and
Correct



_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Guess
_Read
_Listen and
check
_Do the
exercise
_Listen and
do


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

<b>(8ms)</b>


<b>II.Consoli</b>
<b>dation:</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work:</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


_Corrects their mistakes if neccessry.


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Gives some things and asks the students to work in pairs
and practice asking and answering about the price


_Calls some pairs to practice before the class.



_Asks some students to go to the board and write their
sentences


_Corrects the mistakes if necessary.


<b>* Play the game “Find Things How Much”</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs :one asks a question
and the other says the name of the person.


A: How much is a phone card?
B :---(tell the price)
_Asks the students to:
+Repractise B3,4,5


+Learn by heart the new words
+Prepare the new lesson.
_Remarks the students’study.


_Roleplay
_Correct
_Work in
pairs
_Roleplay
_Write their
sentences
_Correct
_Work in
pairs



_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>





---


---


---


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b> </b>


<b> LESSON PLAN</b>
<b> UNIT: REVISION</b>
<b> Period :52</b>


<b> Date Of Preparation:</b>
<b> Date Of Teaching:</b>
<b> Classes: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>



+To help the students review the vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 4.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do exercises relating to the structures they have
learned.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To help students have their habit of revising the old lesson.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills.


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Knowing how to solve the exercises in the book.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Pictures, Revision,Questions and Answers,Gap-Fill,Correction


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Charts,Pictures,Cards,Mini-Board.



<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Language Focus”


<b>5. Previous exercises</b>: Unit 8 _ B :At The Post Office(B3,4,5)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps And</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’ Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I. </b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the </b>
<b>new </b>


<b>material-s</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(15ms)</b>


<b>UNIT: REVISION</b>


<b>I. Lead -in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Wordsquare”</b>


_Divides the class into two groups and has
them play the game.


_Says :”Each line has a picture and you
must say the name for it.Which team doing
more is the winner.”


<b>R</b> U L E R


<b>E</b> R A S E R


K N I <b>V</b> E S


K <b>I</b> S S


D R E <b>S</b> S


P <b>I</b> C K



D <b>O</b> G


M A <b>N</b>


_Introduces the new lesson “Now, we are
going to review the vocabulary as well as
the structures from unit 1 to unit 4”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>* Revision:</b>
<b>1.Tenses:</b>


<b>a</b>.<b>The present continuous tense:</b>
<b>+ Form</b>:


<b>S + Is/Am/Are +Ving </b>


Example:


•I am playing soccer now.


+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express an action


happening at speaking. There are always
some adverbs such as “Now,At present,At
speaking,At the moment.”


<b>b.The Simple Present Tense:</b>
<b>+ Form: </b>



_Play the
game


_Listen and
guess the
lesson


_Listen and
copy


_Listen and


<b>UNIT :REVISION</b>
<b>Period: 52</b>


<b>I.Revision:</b>
<b>1.Tenses:</b>


<b>a</b>.<b>The present continuous </b>
<b>tense:</b>


<b>+ Form</b>:


<b>S + Is/Am/Are </b>
<b>+Ving </b>


Example:


•I am playing soccer now.
+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express an


action happening at speaking.
There are always some
adverbs such as “Now,At
present,At speaking,At the
moment.”


<b>b.The Simple Present </b>
<b>Tense:</b>


<b>+ Form: </b>


<b>S + Vs(es) </b>


Example:


•I often play football.
+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express a
habit,a true. There are always
some adverbs such as


“Often,Always,Usually,Rarel
y,Seldom,


Never,Sometime,.”


<b>c.The Simple Future Tense:</b>
<b>+ Form: </b>


<b>S + Will +Vbare </b>
<b>infinitive </b>



Example:


•I will play football
tomorrow.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<b>S + Vs(es) </b>


Example:


•I often play football.


+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express a habit,a true.
There are always some adverbs such as
“Often,Always,Usually,Rarely,Seldom,
Never,Sometime,.”


<b>c.The Simple Future Tense:</b>
<b>+ Form: </b>


<b>S + Will +Vbare infinitive </b>


Example:


•I will play football tomorrow.


+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express an action will
happen in future. There are always some
adverbs such as “Tomorrow,Next



Week/Month/Year…”
_Reminds the students of


determiners”This,That,These,Those”


<b>+ This : (Short distance) Đây là</b>
<b>+ That :(long distance) Đó là</b>


<b>+ These (The plural of This) Những cái </b>
<b>này là</b>


<b>+ Those :(The plural of That) Những cái </b>
<b>đó là</b>


_Reminds the students of Exclaimations


<b> What a/an+Adjective+Noun!</b>


Ex: What a beautiful girl!


_Reminds the students of Comparatives
and Superlatives


1.Comparatives:
a) Short Adjectives:


S1+ V + ADJ+ER+THAN+ S2
Ex: I am taller than he.


b) Long Adjectives:



S1+ V+MORE+ADJ+THAN+S2
Ex: I am more beautiful than she.
2.Superlatives:


a) Short Adjectives:
S1+ V + ADJ+EST+…..
Ex: I am the tallest in my class.
b) Long Adjectives:


S1+ V+THE+MOST+ADJ+…..
Ex: I am the most beautiful in my class.
_Reminds the students of the


structure”<b>There is/are..”</b>


<b> There is + Singular Noun .</b>


Ex: There is a table.


<b> There are +Plural Noun.</b>


copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and


copy


action will happen in future.
There are always some
adverbs such as


“Tomorrow,Next
Week/Month/Year…”


<b>2.Determiners”This,That,</b>
<b>These,Those”</b>


+ This : (Short distance) Đây


+ That :(long distance) Đó là
+ These (The plural of This)
Những cái này là


+ Those :(The plural of That)
Những cái đó là


<b>3. Exclaimations</b>
<b> </b>


<b>What a/an+Adjective+Noun!</b>


Ex: What a beautiful girl!


<b>4. Comparatives and </b>


<b>Superlatives</b>


<b>a.Comparatives:</b>
<b>a1) Short Adjectives:</b>


<b> S1+ V + ADJ+ER + THAN+</b>
<b>S2</b>


Ex: I am taller than he.


<b>a2) Long Adjectives:</b>


<b> S1+ V+MORE+ADJ+THAN</b>
<b>+S2</b>


Ex: I am more beautiful than
she.


<b>b.Superlatives:</b>
<b>b1) Short Adjectives:</b>
<b> S1+ V + ADJ+EST+…..</b>


Ex: I am the tallest in my
class.


<b>b2) Long Adjectives:</b>


<b>S1+ V+THE +MOST +ADJ +</b>
<b>…..</b>



Ex: I am the most beautiful in
my class.


<b> 5. The structure</b>”<b>There </b>
<b>is/are..”</b>


<b> There is + Singular Noun .</b>


Ex: There is a table.


<b> There are +Plural Noun.</b>


Ex: There are many tables.


<b>II.Answers:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>(15ms)</b>


<b>(3ms)</b>


Ex: There are many tables.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in groups of 8
and do the following exercises.


<b>1. Supply the correct tense of the verbs </b>
<b>in brackets:</b>



a.He(go)---- to HCMC tomorrow.
b.She(learn)----English now.
c.Nam often(stay)----up late.


d.We(talk)---to our teacher at present.
e.There(be)---a student in the class.
f.There(be)---two cars .


<b>2.Make the exclaimations for the </b>
<b>following sentences:</b>


Ex: The girl is very beautiful.
What a beautiful girl!
a.The boy is very handsome.
b.The house is very nice.
c.The table is very tall.
d.The book is very thick.


<b>3.Supply the correct forms of adjectives</b>


a.Nu is(beautiful)---than Tra.
b.We are(tall)---than they.


c.He drives(carelessly)---in his family.
d.He is(fat)---in his class.


_Calls some students to read their
answers.


_Asks the students to go to the board and


write their answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


1.


a) will go b) is learning
c) stays d) are talking
e) is f) are


2.


a)What a handsome boy!
b) What a nice house!
c)What a tall table!
d)What a thick book!
3,


a)more beautiful
b)taller


c)the most carelessly
d)the fatest


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the following exercise:



_Work in
groups


_Read before
the class
_Write their
answers
_Correct


a) will go b) is
learning


c) stays d) are
talking


e) is f)
are


2.


a)What a handsome boy!
b) What a nice house!
c)What a tall table!
d)What a thick book!
3,


a)more beautiful
b)taller


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<b></b>


<b>II.Conso-lidation</b>
<b>(2ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


I.Multiple Choice:


1.She----coffee every morning.


a)drinks b)will drink c)is drinking
2.He---- the exercise tomorrow.


a)does b)will do c) is doing
3.They---their homework now.
a)do b) are doing c)will do
4.Peter----now.


a)is singing b)will sing c) sings
5.Lan---breakfast everyday.


a)is having b)has d)will have
_Asks the students to exchange their
answers.


_Calls some students to read their answers
_Corrects their mistakes.


_Asks one student to tell the content of the
lesson before the class.



_Asks the students to:


+ Do the exercises in their workbooks.
+ Review for the first term test


_Remarks the students’study.


_do the
exercise


_Correct
_Exchange
their answers
_Read their
answers
_Correct
_One tells the
content
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>














---


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b> </b>


<b> </b>


<b> </b>
<b> </b>


<b> LESSON PLAN</b>
<b> UNIT: REVISION</b>
<b> Period :53</b>


<b> Date Of Preparation:</b>
<b> Date Of Teaching:</b>
<b> Classes: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review the vocabulary and structures from unit 5 to unit 8.


<b>_Language function:</b>



+By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to do exercises relating to the structures they have
learned.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To help students have their habit of revising the old lesson.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision


<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills.


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Knowing how to solve the exercises in the book.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Pictures, Revision,Questions and Answers, Gap-Fill,Correction.


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Charts,Pictures, Mini-Board.


<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: Revision


<b>5. Previous exercises</b>: Revision



<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization:(2ms)</b>
<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<b>2. Checking the previous knowledge:</b>
<b>+ Questions:</b>


<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teaching</b>
<b>Steps And</b>


<b>Time</b>


<b>Teacher’ Activities</b> <b>Students’</b>
<b>Activities</b>


<b>The Content Of</b>
<b>The Lesson</b>
<b>I. </b>


<b></b>
<b>Presenta-tion of the </b>
<b>new </b>
<b>material-s</b>
<b>(5ms)</b>


<b>(15ms)</b>



<b>UNIT: REVISION</b>


<b>I. Lead -in:</b>


<b>* Play the game”Who is quicker”</b>


_Divides the class into two groups and has
them play the game.


_Says :”When I read a word in vietnamese
,you must go to the board and stick the
correct word in English.Which team doing
more is the winner.”


1.<b>R</b>iver _Sông
2.D<b>e</b>sk _Cái bàn
3.<b>V</b>illage _Ngôi làng
4.R<b>i</b>ce _Gạo,lúa
5.<b>S</b>tore _Cửa hàng
6.N<b>i</b>ce _Đẹp
7.D<b>o</b>ctor _Bác sĩ
8.<b>N</b>ow _Bây giờ


_Introduces the new lesson “Now, we are
going to review the vocabulary as well as
the structures from unit 5 to unit 8”


<b>II. Pre-Practice:</b>
<b>* Revision:</b>



_Reminds the students of subjects.
+Physical education (n) Môn Thể Dục
+Geography (n) Môn Địa Lý


+Chemistry (n) Mơn Hóa Học
+English (n) Mơn Tiếng Anh
+Math (n) Mơn Tốn


+History (n) Mơn Lịch Sử


_Reminds the students of adverbs of
frequency:


<b>a)Meanings</b>


+ Never : Không bao giờ
+Seldom :Hiếm khi
+Always :Luôn Luôn
+ Usually: Thường Thường


_Play the
game
_Listen and
guess the
lesson
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy


<b>UNIT :REVISION</b>
<b>Period: 53</b>
<b>I.Revision:</b>
<b>1.Tenses:</b>


<b>a</b>.<b>The present continuous </b>
<b>tense:</b>


<b>+ Form</b>:


<b>S + Is/Am/Are </b>
<b>+Ving </b>


Example:


•I am playing soccer now.
+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express an
action happening at speaking.
There are always some
adverbs such as “Now,At
present,At speaking,At the
moment.”


<b>b.The Simple Present </b>
<b>Tense:</b>


<b>+ Form: </b>


<b>S + Vs(es) </b>



Example:


•I often play football.
+ <b>Use </b>: Used to express a
habit,a true. There are always
some adverbs such as


“Often,Always,Usually,Rarel
y,Seldom,


Never,Sometime,.”


<b>c.The Simple Future Tense:</b>
<b>+ Form: </b>


<b>S + Will +Vbare </b>
<b>infinitive </b>


Example:


•I will play football
tomorrow.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

<b>(15ms)</b>


+ Sometimes:Thỉnh thoảng


<b>b)Positions:</b>


+ Trước động từ thường:


Ex: I often go to school.


+Sau động từ TOBE và Trợ động từ:
Ex: I am never late for school.


_Reminds the students of some ways of
making suggestions and accepting or
refusing them.


<b>a) Suggestions:</b>


+ Let’s + V bare infinitive


+ Should we + Vbare infinitive…?
+ Would you like +To infinitive…?


<b>b) Acception:</b>


+ O.K
+I’d love to


<b>c) Refusion</b>


+I’m sorry
+I can’t


_Reminds the students of the structure


<b>“How far..”and “How much…”</b>
<b>a) How far is it from…..to……?</b>



Ex: How far is it from your house to
school?


<b>b) How much + to be + S?</b>


<b>S+tobe+…</b>


Ex1: How much is the pen?
It is 3,000 dong.


Ex2: How much are the books?
They are 15,000 dong.


_Reminds the students of the compound
adjectives.


Ex : A book is 1,500 dong.
<i><b>A 1500 dong</b></i> book.


<b>III. Controlled-Practice:</b>


<b>_</b>Asks the students to work in groups of 8
and do the following exercises.


<b>1. Give the correct place of adverbs of </b>
<b>frequency:</b>


a.He goes to school by bike. (Often)
b.She learns English.(Always)


c.Nam stays up late.(Rarely)
d.We talk to our teacher.(Usually)


e.There is a student in the class.(Seldom)
f.I don’t have much money.(Always)


<b>2.Make questions,using the </b>
<b>structure:”How far..?” or “How </b>
<b>much…?”</b>
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Listen and
copy
_Work in
groups
“Tomorrow,Next
Week/Month/Year…”
<b>2.Determiners”This,That,</b>
<b>These,Those”</b>


+ This : (Short distance) Đây


+ That :(long distance) Đó là
+ These (The plural of This)
Những cái này là


+ Those :(The plural of That)


Những cái đó là


<b>3. Exclaimations</b>
<b> </b>


<b>What a/an+Adjective+Noun!</b>


Ex: What a beautiful girl!


<b>4. Comparatives and </b>
<b>Superlatives</b>


<b>a.Comparatives:</b>
<b>a1) Short Adjectives:</b>


<b> S1+ V + ADJ+ER + THAN+</b>
<b>S2</b>


Ex: I am taller than he.


<b>a2) Long Adjectives:</b>


<b> S1+ V+MORE+ADJ+THAN</b>
<b>+S2</b>


Ex: I am more beautiful than
she.


<b>b.Superlatives:</b>
<b>b1) Short Adjectives:</b>


<b> S1+ V + ADJ+EST+…..</b>


Ex: I am the tallest in my
class.


<b>b2) Long Adjectives:</b>


<b>S1+ V+THE +MOST +ADJ +</b>
<b>…..</b>


Ex: I am the most beautiful in
my class.


<b> 5. The structure</b>”<b>There </b>
<b>is/are..”</b>


<b> There is + Singular Noun .</b>


Ex: There is a table.


<b> There are +Plural Noun.</b>


Ex: There are many tables.


<b>II.Answers:</b>


1.


a) will go b) is
learning



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

<b>(3ms)</b>


Ex1: Hue-Vinh :200km


How far is it from Hue to Vinh?
It’s about 200km.


Ex2:A book : 1500 dong
How much is a book?
It is 1500 dong.


a.Sai Gon_ Ha Noi : 2000 km
b.Qui Nhon _HCMC : 700km.
c.A table :2000000 dong.


d. two computers :14000000 dong.
_Has the students compare their answers
_Calls some students to read their
answers.


_Asks the students to go to the board and
write their answers.


_Gives feedback.
*Answers:


1.


a) will go b) is learning


c) stays d) are talking
e) is f) are


2.


a)What a handsome boy!
b) What a nice house!
c)What a tall table!
d)What a thick book!
3,


a)more beautiful
b)taller


c)the most carelessly
d)the fatest


<b>IV.Free-Practice:</b>


_Asks the students to work in pairs and do
the following exercise:


I.Multiple Choice:


1.She----coffee every morning.


a)drinks b)will drink c)is drinking
2.He---- the exercise tomorrow.


a)does b)will do c) is doing


3.They---their homework now.
a)do b) are doing c)will do
4.Peter----now.


a)is singing b)will sing c) sings
5.Lan---breakfast everyday.


a)is having b)has d)will have
_Asks the students to exchange their
answers.


_Calls some students to read their answers


_Compare
_Read before
the class
_Write their
answers
_Correct


_do the
exercise


_Correct
_Exchange


talking


e) is f)
are



2.


a)What a handsome boy!
b) What a nice house!
c)What a tall table!
d)What a thick book!
3,


a)more beautiful
b)taller


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b></b>
<b>II.Conso-lidation</b>
<b>(2ms)</b>
<b></b>
<b>III.Home-work</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


_Corrects their mistakes.


_Asks one student to tell the content of the
lesson before the class.


_Asks the students to:


+ Do the exercises in their workbooks.
+ Review for the first term test


_Remarks the students’study.



their answers
_Read their
answers
_Correct
_One tells the
content
_Listen and
copy


_Listen


<b>* Self-Evaluation:</b>




















</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<b> LESSON PLAN</b>


<b> THE FIRST TERM TEST </b>
<b> Period :54</b>


<b> Date Of Preparation:</b>
<b> Date Of Teaching:</b>
<b> Classes: 7A</b>


<b>I.OBJECTIVES:</b>
<b>_Language content:</b>


+To help the students review knowledge they’ve learnt from unit 1 to unit 8.


<b>_Language function:</b>


+To enable the students to use previous knowledge to do the test and through the test the teacher can know
the students’ knowledge.


<b>_Educational aim:</b>


+To educate the students aware the importance of learning English and use it in communication.


<b>1. Language:</b>


<b>a. Vocabulary:</b> Revision


<b>b. Structures: </b>Revision



<b>2. Skills</b>: Integrated skills


<b>3. Educational factor</b>:


+Paying attention to learning English.


<b>II.TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ PREPARATION:</b>
<b>1. Method</b>: Communicative approach


<b>2. Techniques</b>: Multiple choice,Gap-Fill,True-False,Rearrangement,Correction.


<b>3. Teaching aids</b>: Papers


<b>4. Students’ preparation</b>: New lesson “Test”


<b>5. Previous exercises :</b>”Language focus”


<b>III. PROCEDURES IN CLASS:</b>
<b>1. Stabilization:</b>


<b>a. Warm-up</b>: Greetings.


<b>b. Checking absence</b>: Who’s absent today?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>+ Keys to the questions:</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>Name:</b>--- <b>Date:</b>


<b>---Class:</b>7A <b>THE FIRST-TERMTEST (English 7)</b>


<b> Time:</b><i>Forty-five minutes</i>


<b>I.Multiple Choice:(Chọn đáp án đúng để điền vào phần trả lời bên cạnh:(4 ms) </b>


1………you tell me the way to the railway station?


a.Do b.Could c.Are d.Does


2I need ……envelops and stamps.


a.some b.any c.a lot d.much


3.The bank is …..the hotel and the restaurant.


a.for b.between c.at d.in


4.Vietnamese students have……..vacation than American ones.


a.few b.fewer c.less d.fewest


5.The mechanic repairs…in a factory.


a.things b.machines c.furniture d.clothes


6.After break,everyone goes……….and classes begin again.


a.outdoors b.indoors c.outside d.on


7.Students have two………breaks each day.



a.20-minutes b.20-minute c.20th<sub> -minutes</sub> <sub>d.20</sub>th<sub> -minute</sub>


8.Would you like to come to my house……lunch?


a.for b.to c.of d.in


<b>II.Reading:(4ms)</b>


<b>A. Read the following dialogue and fill in the blanks with the words given :(2ms)</b>
<b>(Điền từ vào chỗ trống với các từ cho sẵn trong khung,ghi kết quả bên phần trả lời)</b>


<b> Fishing Lucky Sport Say </b>


My name is Huy and fishing is my favorite ….(9)…..I often fish for hours without catching
anything.But this doesn’t worry me.Some fishermen are unlucky.Instead of catching fish,they catch
old boots and rubbish.I am even less ….(10)….I never catch anything,not even old boots.After
spending the whole morning on the river,I always go home with an empty bag.”You should give up
fishing”,my friends …(11)….”It’s waste of time”.But they don’t know that I’m not really interested
in …..(12)….I’m only interested in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all !


<b>B.Read the reading again and then choose the correct answer):(2ms)</b>
<b>(Đọc đoạn văn trên,sau đó chọn đáp án đúng nhất cho các câu dưới)</b>


13.Huy’s hobby is……….<i><b>( Fishing /sports/ Catching boat/ Swimming) </b></i>


14.When does Huy usually go fishing? <i><b>.( In the morning/ At noon/ In the afternoon/In the evening)</b></i>
15.Where does Huy sit to fish? <i><b>(On the river bank/At a large lake/ In a boat/ In the sea) </b></i>


16.What do Huy’s friends advise him? <i><b>(Go fishing at night/Stop fishing/ Fish on other rivers/</b></i>
<i><b> Spend more time on fishing ) </b></i>



<b>III.Writing: (2ms)</b>


<b>A.Rearrange these words in the correct orders:(1ms)</b>


<b>ANSWERS</b>
1……….


2…………
3…………
4………..
5…………
6…………
7…………
8…………


9………….
10………..
11…………
12…………
13………..
14………..
15…………
16………….


17………
……….
18………
………
19………..



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>(Sắp xếp các từ thành câu hoàn chỉnh)</b>


17. get/tell/you/how/could/ me/there/to?
18.bookshelf /small/that/is/very.


<b>B.Find the mistakes in the parts underlined the following </b>
<b>sentences and correct them:(1ms)</b>


<b>(Tìm1 lỗi sai trong 4 phần gạch dưới,sửa lại cho đúng và ghi vào</b>
<b>phần trả lời bên cạnh)</b>


19. Mrs.Brown eats a few fruit for breakfast.


<b> A B C D </b>


20.Long usually stays up lately to do his homework.


<b> A B C D</b>


<i>----The </i>


<b>end----ANSWERS OF THE FIRST-TERM TEST (ENGLISH 7)</b>



<b>QUESTIONS</b> <b>ANSWERS</b> <b>MARKS</b>


<b>1</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>2</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,5</b>



<b>3</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>4</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>5</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>6</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>7</b> <b>B</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>8</b> <b>A</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>9</b> <b>Sports</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>10</b> <b>Lucky</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>11</b> <b>Say</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>12</b> <b>Fishing</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>13</b> <b>Fishing</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>14</b> <b>In the morning</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>15</b> <b>In a boat</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>16</b> <b>Stop fishing</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>17</b> <b>Could you tell me how to get there?</b> <b>0,5</b>



<b>18</b> <b>That bookshelf is very small.</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>19</b> <b>C_Fruits</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>20</b> <b>C_Late</b> <b>0,5</b>


<b>TOTAL</b> <b>10</b>


<b> THE QUALIFICATION TABLE</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<b> 7A</b>
<b> 7A</b>
<b> </b>
<b> 7A</b>








-


---

-


---

---



-
---


<b>---* Self-Evaluation:</b>










</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×